2007 Saturn ION Owner Manual M · 2007 Saturn ION Owner Manual M 1. ... 77 Servicing Your...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Rear Seats ............................................. 16Safety Belts ............................................ 18Child Restraints ...................................... 41Airbag System ........................................ 68Restraint System Check ......................... 84

Features and Controls ................................ 87Keys ....................................................... 89Doors and Locks .................................... 94Windows ............................................... 100Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 103Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 104Mirrors .................................................. 122OnStar® System ................................... 129Storage Areas ...................................... 133Sunroof ................................................ 135

Instrument Panel ....................................... 137Instrument Panel Overview ................... 140Climate Controls ................................... 155Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 163Message Center ................................... 182Audio System(s) ................................... 186

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 217Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 218Towing ................................................. 256

Service and Appearance Care .................. 267Service ................................................. 270Fuel ...................................................... 272Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 278Headlamp Aiming ................................. 318Bulb Replacement ................................ 318

2007 Saturn ION Owner Manual M

1

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 327Tires ..................................................... 328Appearance Care .................................. 366Vehicle Identification ............................. 374Electrical System .................................. 375Capacities and Specifications ................ 384

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 387Maintenance Schedule .......................... 388

Customer Assistance Information ............. 409Customer Assistance and Information ..... 410Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 424

Index .......................................................... 427

2

SATURN, the SATURN Emblem, and the nameION are registered trademarks of SaturnCorporation. GENERAL MOTORS and GM areregistered trademarks of General MotorsCorporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15860076 B Second Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Seats ................................................ 8Driver Seat Height Adjuster ........................... 9Manual Lumbar ............................................. 9Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 10Head Restraints .......................................... 13Passenger Folding Seatback ....................... 14

Rear Seats .................................................... 16Split Folding Rear Seat ............................... 16

Safety Belts .................................................. 18Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 18Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .... 23How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 24Driver Position ............................................. 24Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment (Sedan) .... 31Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 32Right Front Passenger Position ................... 32Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 33Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 36Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 40Safety Belt Extender ................................... 40

Child Restraints ............................................ 41Older Children ............................................. 41Infants and Young Children ......................... 44

Child Restraint Systems .............................. 47Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 52Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 53Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position ........................................... 61Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position .................................. 64Airbag System .............................................. 68

Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 71When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 73What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 75How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 75What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................... 76Passenger Sensing System ......................... 77Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 82Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 83Restraint System Check ............................... 84

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 84Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ................................................... 85

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat with yourbody to be sure the seat is locked in place.

8

Driver Seat Height Adjuster

If your vehicle has a driver’s seat height adjusterit, is located on the outboard side of the seat.

To raise the seat, move the lever upwardrepeatedly until the seat is at the desired height.To lower the seat, move the lever downwardrepeatedly until the seat is at the desired height.

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the knob islocated on the frontof the driver seatlower cushion on theinboard side.

Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the lumbar support.

9

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. Thelever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seats.

10

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

11

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash,you could go into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

CAUTION: (Continued)

12


The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright. Thensit well back in the seat and wear yoursafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

13

Pull the head restraintup to raise it. To lowerthe head restraint,press the button,located on the top of theseatback, and pushthe restraint down.

Passenger Folding SeatbackYour vehicle may have a passenger seat thatfolds flat.

{CAUTION:

If you fold the seatback forward to carrylonger objects, such as skis, be sure anysuch cargo is not near an airbag. In acrash, an inflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. This could causesevere injury or even death. Secureobjects away from the area in which anairbag would inflate. For moreinformation, see Where Are the Airbags?on page 71 and Loading Your Vehicle onpage 250.

{CAUTION:

Things you put on this seatback canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash. Remove or secureall items before driving.

14

To fold the seatback flat, do the following:

1. Lift the bar under the seat to unlock it.

2. Slide the seat as far back as it will go andrelease the bar. Try to move the seat withyour body to make sure it is locked into place.

3. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboardside of the seat, and fold the seat forwarduntil the seatback disengages.

4. Release the recliner lever and fold the seatforward until it locks in the folded position.Pull up on the seatback to be sure it is locked.

15

To raise the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboardside of the seat, and lift the seatback.

2. Push the seatback until it re-engages.

{CAUTION:


3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked in place.

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatYou can fold either side of the rear seatback downfor more cargo space.

To lower the rear seatback, follow these steps:

1. Open the trunk and pull one or both of the smallhandles located in the center of the trunk.

16

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Once the handle is pulled, the seatback canbe pushed open through the trunk, or pulledopen from the inside of the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. Thatcould cause injury to the person sittingthere. Always pull forward on the top of theseatback at the area of the latch to be sureit is locked.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

17

To raise the rear seatback, lift it up and rearwarduntil you hear a click. Push and pull on the seatbackto be sure it is locked into place.

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

18

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts. SeeSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 166 andPassenger Safety Belt Reminder Light onpage 166.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

19

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

20

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

21

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

22

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speeds ofless than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

23

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 41 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 44. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

24

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks. If the belt stops before it reaches thebuckle, let it go back all the way and startagain.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 40.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. If your vehicle is a sedan, move the shoulderbelt height adjuster to the height that is rightfor you. Improper shoulder belt heightadjustment could reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See ShoulderBelt Height Adjustment (Sedan) on page 31.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.

25

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop orcrash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of theretractor.

26

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

27


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

28


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

29


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask yourretailer to fix it.

30

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on thebuckle. The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment(Sedan)Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Incorrect positioningof the shoulder belt can reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt.

To move it down, pressthe release button (A)and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition. You canmove the heightadjuster up just bypushing up onthe shoulder belt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without pressingthe release button to make sure it has locked intoposition.

31

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 24.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature which may turn offthe passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, justlet the belt go back all the way and start again.

32

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

33

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks. If your vehicle has a center passengerposition, be sure to use the correct bucklewhen buckling your lap-shoulder belt. Ifyou find that the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, see if you are using the bucklefor the center passenger position.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

34

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or acrash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out ofthe retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

35

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

36

There is one guide for each outboard passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the shoulder belt:

1. Fold down the rear seatback of the desiredseating position. See Split Folding Rear Seaton page 16 for instructions about how tofold the rear seatback.

2. Remove the guide located on the trim behindthe seatback from its storage clip. Pull theguide around the rear seatback.

{CAUTION:


3. Return the rear seatback to its upright positionand make sure it is latched into place.

37

4. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then,place the guide over the belt and insertthe two edges of the belt into the slots of theguide.

5. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

38

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly wornmay not provide the protection needed ina crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restrainingforces.

6. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 33. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Fold down the rearseatbacks. Store the guides on their storage clips.Lift the rear seatbacks to their original seatingpositions.

39

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 85.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your retailerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information, see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

40

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

41

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 36. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

42

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

43

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesnot weigh much — until a crash. During acrash a baby will become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it. For example, in a crashat only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg)baby will suddenly become a 240 lb(110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A babyshould be secured in an appropriaterestraint.

44

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither the



vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

45

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kinds ofrestraints available for children with specialneeds.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

46

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quiteunlike that of an adult or older child, forwhom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up around thechild’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt wouldapply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

47

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

48

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

49

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety beltor LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 53 for more information. A child canbe endangered in a crash if the child restraint isnot properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

50

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

51

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that children be secured in arear seat, including an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in thefront.” This is because the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This is



because the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

52

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

53

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) ora dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether to theanchor.

54

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

Rear Seat — Sedan

55

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

For sedan models, each rear seating position hasexposed metal lower anchors in the creasebetween the seatback and the seat cushion. Forcoupe models, each rear outboard seating positionhas exposed metal lower anchors in the creasebetween the seatback and the seat cushion.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located on thetrim cover.

Rear Seat — Coupe

56

For sedan models, the top tether anchors arelocated under the trim covers on the rear windowtrim panel. Be sure to use an anchor locatedon the same side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint will be placed.

For coupe models, the top tether anchors arelocated under trim covers on the filler panel. Besure to use an anchor located on the same side ofthe vehicle as the seating position where thechild restraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 52 for additional information.

Sedan Coupe

57

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

58

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

59

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor trim

cover to expose the anchor.2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing has a fixedheadrest and you areusing a single tether,route the tether over thehead restraint.

60

If the position you areusing has a fixedheadrest and you areusing a dual tether,route the tether aroundthe head restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 53.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

61

3. Buckle the belt. Be sure the latch plate clickswhen you put it into the buckle. This meansyou are using the correct buckle. Also,make sure the release button is positioned soyou would be able to unbuckle the safetybelt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

62

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and to Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 53.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

63

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 52.

In addition, your vehicle may have the passengersensing system. The passenger sensing systemis designed to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facinginfant seat or a small child in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 77 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 168 formore information on this including importantsafety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.


64


If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualSeats on page 8.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 53.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child restraint inthis position if a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored or if theinstructions that come with the child restraint saythat the top tether must be anchored. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 53 if your child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 77. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seat asfar back as it will go before securing thechild restraint in this seat. See Manual Seatson page 8.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passengerairbag status indicator should light and stay litwhen you turn the ignition to RUN orSTART. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 168.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

65

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

66

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


8. If your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem and the airbag is off, the off indicatoron the instrument panel will be lit and staylit when the key is turned to RUN or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your retailer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

67

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver anda frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted sideimpact airbags. Roof-mounted side impact airbagsare available for the driver and the passengerseated directly behind the driver and for the rightfront passenger and the passenger seateddirectly behind that passenger.

If your vehicle has side impact airbags, the wordsAIR BAG will appear on the airbag covering onthe ceiling near the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s window.

Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce therisk of injury from the force of an inflatingfrontal airbag. But these airbags must inflate veryquickly to do their job and comply with federalregulations.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.


68


Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflate inrollover, rear crashes, or in many sidecrashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Roof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal, in rollover or in rearcrashes. Everyone in your vehicle shouldwear a safety belt properly — whether ornot there is an airbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

69

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 41 or Infants and Young Children onpage 44.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 167 for more information.

70

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

71

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the driver and the person seated directlybehind the driver, it is in the ceiling above theside windows.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger and the personseated directly behind that passenger, it is inthe ceiling above the side windows.

72

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. And, if your vehiclehas roof-mounted side impact airbags,never secure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tie downthrough any door or window opening. Ifyou do, the path of an inflating sideimpact airbag will be blocked. The path ofan inflating airbag must be kept clear.

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

73

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts,the airbags inflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontal impacts, fulldeployment occurs. If the front of your vehiclegoes straight into a wall that does not moveor deform, the threshold level for the reduceddeployment is about 16 to 20 mph (26 to 32 km/h),and the threshold level for a full deployment is25 to 30 mph (40 to 48 km/h). The threshold levelcan vary, however, with specific vehicle design,so that it can be somewhat above or belowthis range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight into theobject.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle may or may not have roof-mountedside impact airbags. See Airbag System onpage 68. Roof-mounted side impact airbags areintended to inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. A roof-mounted side impact airbag willinflate if the crash severity is above the system’sdesigned “threshold level.” The threshold levelcan vary with specific vehicle design.Roof-mounted side impact airbags are notintended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. A roof-mounted sideimpact airbag is intended to deploy on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

74

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown. For roof-mounted side impact airbags,inflation is determined by the location and severityof the impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules inside thesteering wheel and in the instrument panel in frontof the right front passenger. For vehicles withroof-mounted side impact airbags, there are alsoairbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. Butthe frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

75

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realizethe airbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impactairbags may still be at least partially inflatedminutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Somecomponents of the airbag module — the steeringwheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrumentpanel for the right front passenger’s airbag, or thegarnish trim and ceiling of your vehicle nearthe side windows for vehicles with roof–mountedside impact airbags — may be hot for a short time.The parts of the airbag that come into contactwith you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.There may be some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,and turn on the hazard warning flashers when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors again,turn the interior lamps off, and turn the hazardwarning flashers off by using the controls for thosefeatures.

76

In many crashes severe enough to inflate anairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passengerairbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will needsome new parts for the airbag system. If youdo not get them, the airbag system willnot be there to help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need toreplace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 418.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can mean thatthe airbag system will not work properly.See your retailer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemIf your vehicle has one of the indicators pictured inthe following illustrations, then your vehicle hasa passenger sensing system. The passengerairbag status indicator on the instrument panel willbe visible when you turn your ignition key toRUN or START.

The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check.When the system check is complete, either theword ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on orthe symbol for off will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 168.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

United States Canada

77

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the passenger’s frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


78


If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• There is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the offindicator on the instrument panel will light andstay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 64.

79

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing thechild restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust theseat cushion if possible. Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicleand check with your retailer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag, depending uponthe person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor about two minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enable thepassenger’s airbag.

80

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system. Ifthis ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 167 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

81

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seat massagers,can affect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. Remove any additional material fromthe seat cushion before reinstalling or securing thechild restraint and before a small occupant,including a small adult, sits in the right frontpassenger position. You may want to consider notusing seat covers or other aftermarket equipmentif your vehicle has the passenger sensingsystem. See Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 83 for moreinformation about modifications that can affect howthe system operates.

The passenger sensing system may suppress theairbag deployment when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the off indicator in thepassenger airbag status indicator and theairbag readiness light on the instrument panel willbe lit. The system should resume normaloperation after the seat is allowed to dry. If thesystem operates incorrectly after the seathas dried, have your retailer check the system.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your retailer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 425.

82

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 410.

83

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceiling andpillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbagmodules, or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure onpage 410.

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 369for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

84

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,or the roof-mounted side impact airbagcovering (if equipped) on the garnish trim andceiling near the side windows, the airbagmay not work properly. You may have toreplace the airbag module in the steeringwheel, both the airbag module and theinstrument panel for the right front passenger’sairbag, or the side impact airbag module,garnish trim and the ceiling covering forroof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped).Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.

85

If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If your seat adjuster will not work after a crash, thespecial part of the safety belt that goes throughthe seat to the adjuster may need to be replaced.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replaceairbag system parts. See the part about the airbagsystem earlier in this manual.

If the frontal airbags inflate you will need toreplace the driver’s and right front passengerssafety belt retractor assembly. Be sure to do so.Then the new retractor assembly will be thereto help protect you in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 167.

86

Keys .............................................................. 89Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 90Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ................................................. 91Doors and Locks .......................................... 94

Door Locks ................................................. 94Power Door Locks ....................................... 95Delayed Locking .......................................... 95Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 96Rear Door Security Locks (Sedan) .............. 96Lockout Protection ....................................... 97Rear Doors (Coupe) .................................... 97Trunk .......................................................... 98

Windows ...................................................... 100Manual Windows ....................................... 100Power Windows ........................................ 101Sun Visors ................................................ 102

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 103Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 103Passlock® .................................................. 103

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 104New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 104Ignition Positions ....................................... 105Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 108Starting the Engine .................................... 108Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 110Manual Transaxle Operation ...................... 112Parking Brake ........................................... 115Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 116Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 118Parking Your Vehicle

(Manual Transaxle) ................................ 118Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 119Engine Exhaust ......................................... 120Running the Engine While Parked ............. 121

Section 2 Features and Controls

87

Mirrors ......................................................... 122Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar®, Compass andTemperature Display .............................. 122

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror withCompass and Temperature Display ........ 125

Outside Remote Control Mirror .................. 128Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 128Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 129

OnStar® System .......................................... 129Storage Areas ............................................. 133

Glove Box ................................................. 133Cupholder(s) .............................................. 133Center Console Storage Area .................... 133Roof Rack System .................................... 134Convenience Net ....................................... 134

Sunroof ....................................................... 135

Section 2 Features and Controls

88

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keys in theignition and they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

89

This key operates theignition and all of thelock cylinders onthe vehicle.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemYour vehicle may have a Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) system. The RKE system operates ona radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada.This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

90

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any remote keyless entry system.If the transmitter does not work or if you have tostand closer to your vehicle for the transmitterto work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 91.

• If you are still having trouble, see your retaileror a qualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationWith this feature, you can lock and unlock thedoors or the trunk from about 26 feet (8 m) awayusing the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter supplied with your vehicle.

Q (Lock): Press thissymbol on the RKEtransmitter to lock thedoors. This alsoarms the theft-deterrentsystem. See ContentTheft-Deterrent onpage 103.

Your vehicle can be programmed so that theparking lamps will flash and/or the horn will soundwhen you lock the doors with the RKE transmitter.See your retailer for more information onprogramming this feature.

91

W (Unlock): Press this symbol on the RKEtransmitter to unlock the driver’s door. This alsodisarms the theft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 103. Press the buttonagain to unlock the rest of the doors.

Your vehicle can be programmed so that theparking lamps will flash and/or the horn will soundwhen you unlock the doors with the RKEtransmitter. See your retailer for more informationon programming this feature.

L (Panic Alarm): The RKE transmitter has aninstant panic alarm. Press the horn symbolwhen the ignition is turned off. The horn will soundand the parking lamps and dome lamp will flashfor up to two minutes. To stop the instantpanic alarm, press the symbol again.

V (Trunk): Press and hold this button forapproximately one second to open the trunk. If thevehicle’s speed is faster than 2 mph (3 km/h),the trunk will not open when this button is pressed.The RKE transmitter is used to arm/disarm thetheft-deterrent system. The system will arm whenthe lock button on the RKE transmitter pressed.The system will disarm when the unlock button ispressed.

Matching Transmitter(s) toYour VehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your retailer. Remember tobring any remaining transmitters with youwhen you go to your retailer. When the retailermatches the replacement transmitter to yourvehicle, any remaining transmitters must also bematched. Once your retailer has coded thenew transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlockyour vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximumof four transmitters matched to it.

92

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitterwill not work at the normal range in any location.If you have to get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works, it is probably time to changethe battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

1. Use a flat thin object to pry open thetransmitter.

2. Once the transmitter is separated, use atoothpick, pen cap, or similar object to removethe old battery. Do not use a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery as the instructionsunder the cover indicate.

4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly somoisture cannot enter.

5. Check the operation of the transmitter.

93

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. Achild can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock your vehicle.

To lock a door from the outside, turn thekey toward the front of the vehicle or use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if yourvehicle has one.

94

From the inside, movethe manual lock knobabove the doorhandle or use the powerdoor lock switch.

Power Door Locks

Press the top of theswitch to unlock thedoors. Press the bottomof the switch to lockthe doors.

Delayed LockingThis feature will delay the actual locking of thedoors for up to five seconds when the power doorlock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.

If any door is open when locking the vehicle,three chimes will be heard signaling thatthe delayed locking feature is active. Five secondsafter the last door is closed, all of the doors willlock and the parking lamps will flash. To cancel thedelay and lock the doors immediately, press thelock button a second time.

If the key is in the ignition this feature will not lockthe doors.

95

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksWith this feature, the doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P) forvehicles with an automatic transaxle, or the vehiclespeed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h) forvehicles with a manual transaxle. The doors willautomatically unlock when the ignition is turned off.

To turn the automatic door locking feature on oroff, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN with the engine offand all of the doors closed.

2. Press and hold the power door lock button inthe lock position until the horn chirps twice.

To turn the automatic door unlocking feature on oroff, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN with the engine offand all of the doors closed.

2. Press and hold the power door lock button inthe unlock position until the horn chirps twice.

Rear Door Security Locks (Sedan)Your vehicle has rear door security locks.These prevent passengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door. Youmust open the reardoors to access them.The label depictinglock and unlockpositions is locatednear the lock.

To set the locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot andturn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

Security LockLabel shown

96

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keylessentry transmitter, if the vehicle has one, thepower door lock switch, or by lifting therear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slotand turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Lockout ProtectionIf you press the power door lock switch when thekey is in the ignition and any door is open, allthe doors will lock and the driver’s door will unlock.Be sure to remove the key from the ignitionwhen locking your vehicle.

The lockout protection can be overridden bypressing and holding the power door lock in thelock position for three seconds.

Rear Doors (Coupe)Your vehicle has a driver’s and passenger’s siderear access door. To open the rear accessdoors, first you must open the driver’s orpassenger’s door.

Then use the handle located on the front edge ofthe rear door to open it.

When closing the doors, the rear door must beclosed and latched before you can close thedriver’s or passenger’s door.

97

TrunkTo unlock the trunk from the outside, use thevehicle key or if the vehicle has one, press thetrunk button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, if equipped.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunklid open because carbon monoxide (CO)gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.



If you must drive with the trunk lid openor if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 120.

98

Remote Trunk ReleasePress the remote trunkrelease button, locatedon the lower leftside of the instrumentpanel, to releasethe trunk lid.

The remote trunk release will work when theignition is either in LOCK or ACC, the parkingbrake is engaged, or the vehicle speed is less than2 mph (3 km/h).

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle. The emergencytrunk release handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk, enablingthem to open the trunk from the inside.There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located on the inside of the trunklid. This handle will glow following exposureto light. Pull the release handle and push the trunklid open from the inside to open the trunk.

99

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

Manual WindowsIf your vehicle has manual windows, use thewindow crank to open and close each window.

100

Power Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome fromextreme heat in warm or hot weather andsuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could bebadly injured or even killed. They couldoperate the power windows or othercontrols or even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with the keys inthe ignition and they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leave the keys in



a vehicle with children. When there arechildren in the rear seats use the windowlockout button to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

If your vehicle has powerwindows, switcheslocated on the driver’sdoor armrest controleach of the windows.

In addition, each passenger door has a windowswitch that controls that door’s window. To operateeach window, press the switch forward to closethe window and rearward to open it.

101

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window has an express-down featurewhich allows the window to lower all the waywithout continuously pressing the switch.The switch is labeled AUTO. Press the rear of theswitch all the way down and release.To stop the window while it is lowering, press thefront of the switch.

Window Lockouto (Window Lockout): The window lockoutbutton is located near the driver’s power windowswitches. Press the right side of the button toprevent rear passengers from using their windows.Press the left side of the button to return tonormal window operation.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down the sun visors.You can also swing them to the side.

Visor Vanity MirrorsYour sun visors may have vanity mirrors. If so, thedriver’s mirror is covered. Lift the cover toexpose the mirror.

Passenger Visor Safety Belt Clip (Coupe)

If you have a coupe, the sun visor on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle has a clip. Thisclip is designed to hold the safety belt out ofthe way when entering and exiting the rear seats.Be sure to remove the safety belt from the clipwhen you are done.

Notice: Using the safety belt clip to enter orexit the vehicle, or in any way other thanas it was intended, can damage your vehicle.Do not use the safety belt clip in any way otherthan as it was intended.

102

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter isused to arm/disarm the theft-deterrent system.Your vehicle’s theft-deterrent system can beprogrammed to three different modes.

Active Arming: The system will arm when thelock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.The system will disarm when the unlock buttonis pressed.

Passive Arming: Passive Arming can only beenabled by the retailer. If enabled, the system willarm itself one minute after the ignition is turnedoff and the driver’s door has been openedand closed. If the lock button on the transmitter ispressed before the minute has passed, thesystem will arm immediately. The system willdisarm when the unlock button is pressed.

If you accidentally set off the alarm whenentering/exiting the vehicle, you can shut it off bypressing any button on the RKE transmitterother than the panic alarm button.

If you hear three horn chirps when you press theunlock button on the RKE transmitter, thisindicates that the alarm was triggered while youwere away from your vehicle.

Passlock®

Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®

theft-deterrent system.

Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinderis turned with a valid key. If a correct key isnot used or the ignition lock cylinder is tamperedwith, fuel is disabled.

103

During normaloperation, the securitylight will go offapproximatelythree seconds after thekey is turned to theRUN ignition position.

If the engine stalls and the security light flashes,wait until the light stops flashing before tryingto restart the engine. Remember to releasethe key from START as soon as the enginestarts.

If the engine is running and the security lightcomes on, you will be able to restart the engineif you turn the engine off. However, your Passlock®

system is not working properly and must beserviced by your retailer. Your vehicle is notprotected by Passlock® at this time. You mayalso want to check the fuses, see Fusesand Circuit Breakers on page 375. See yourretailer for service.

Starting and OperatingYour VehicleNew Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Do not exceed 5,000 engine rpm. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during the first1,000 miles (1 600 km). See Towing a Traileron page 259 for the trailer towing capabilitiesof your vehicle and more information.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

104

Ignition PositionsWith the key in the ignition switch, you can turn itto four different positions.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is all theway in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left andright while you turn the key hard. If none of thisworks, then your vehicle needs service.

9 (LOCK): This position locks your steeringcolumn. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will onlybe able to remove your key when the ignition isturned to LOCK.

If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shiftlever is in PARK (P).

{CAUTION:

If you have a manual transaxle removingthe key from the ignition switch will lockthe steering column and result in a loss ofability to steer the vehicle. This couldcause a collision. If you need to turn theengine off while the vehicle is moving,turn the key to ACC.

ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operatessome of your electrical accessories. It unlocks thesteering wheel and ignition.

105

R (RUN): This is the position the switch returns toafter you start your engine and release theswitch. The switch stays in the RUN position whenthe engine is running. But even when the ignitionis not running, you can use RUN to operateyour electrical accessories and to display somewarning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACC or RUN position with the engineoff. You may not be able to start your vehicle ifthe battery is allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

/ (START): This position starts the engine. Whenthe engine starts, release the key. The ignitionswitch will return to RUN for normal driving.

A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’sdoor while in LOCK or ACC, when the key has notbeen removed from the ignition.

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

106

Shift Lock ReleaseFor vehicles with an automatic transmission, thefollowing procedure allows the ignition to be turnedto LOCK and for ignition key removal in case ofa dead battery or low voltage battery.

1. Make sure the shift lever is in PARK (P).

2. Using a tool, pry off the cover from the bottomof the steering column.

3. Place your finger into the access hole andlocate the plunger.

4. Press and hold the plunger toward the driver’sdoor while turning the ignition key to LOCK.Remove the key.

Have your vehicle serviced at your retailer assoon as possible.

107

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory Power(RAP) feature which will allow the radio, wipers,power windows, sunroof and the rear power outletto work after the ignition is turned off.

Your radio will work when the ignition key is inRUN or ACC (Accessory). Once the key is turnedfrom RUN to LOCK, the radio will continue towork for up to 10 minutes or until any dooris opened.

Starting the Engine

Automatic TransaxleMove the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).The engine will not start in any other position — thatis a safety feature. To restart when you are alreadymoving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shiftinto PARK (P) only when your vehicle isstopped.

Manual TransaxleThe shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and theparking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal tothe floor and start the engine. Your vehiclewill not start if the clutch pedal is not all the waydown — that is a safety feature.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition to START. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speed will go downas your engine gets warm. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transaxle gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates all moving parts.Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects the electricalsystem. If the ignition key is turned to START,and then released when the engine beginscranking, the engine will continue crankinguntil the vehicle starts or until it exceeds themaximum cranking time allowed, approximately15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.

108

To prevent starter-motor gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking if the engine isalready running. The engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch to theACC (Accessory) or LOCK.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longerthan 15 seconds at a time will cause yourbattery to be drained much sooner. And theexcessive heat can damage your starter motor.Wait about 15 seconds between each try tohelp avoid draining your battery or damagingyour starter.

2. If it does not start, wait about 15 seconds andtry again to start the engine by turning theignition to START. Wait about 15 secondsbetween each try.When the engine has run about 10 seconds towarm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven.Do not run your engine at high speedwhen it is cold.If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C),let the engine run for a few minutes towarm up.

3. If the engine still will not start, or starts butthen stops, it could be flooded with toomuch gasoline. Try pushing your acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holdingit there as you hold the key in STARTfor about three seconds. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, do the samething, but this time keep the pedal down forfive or six seconds. This clears the extragasoline from the engine.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check with yourretailer. If you do not, your engine might notperform properly. Any resulting damage wouldnot be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

109

Automatic Transaxle OperationIf your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, theshift lever is located on the console betweenthe seats.

There are severaldifferent positions forthe automatic transaxle.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.It is the best position to use when you startyour engine because your vehicle cannotmove easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).See Shifting Into Park (P) (AutomaticTransaxle) on page 116. If you are pullinga trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 259.

110

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle shift lock control system. Youhave to fully apply your regular brakes first andthen press the shift lever button before youcan shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is inRUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), easepressure on the shift lever and push the shift leverall the way into PARK (P) as you maintainbrake application. Then press the shift lever buttonand then move the shift lever into another gear.See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 118.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransaxle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 249.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

111

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving withthe automatic transaxle. It provides the best fueleconomy for your vehicle. If you need more powerfor passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator all the way down.

Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 233.

INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used fornormal driving. However, it reduces vehicle speedwithout using your brakes for slight downgradeswhere the vehicle would otherwise accelerate dueto steepness of grade. If constant upshifting ordownshifting occurs while driving up steep hills, thisposition can be used to prevent repetitive types ofshifts. You might choose INTERMEDIATE (I)instead of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, windingroads and when towing a trailer, so that there is lessshifting between gears.

LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speedmore than INTERMEDIATE (I) without actuallyusing your brakes. You can use it on very steephills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift leveris put in LOW (L), the transaxle will not shift intoLOW (L) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle in place.

Manual Transaxle Operation

This is your shiftpattern.

112

Here is how to operate your transaxle:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift intoFIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are goingless than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up onthe clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down.Then shift into FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you letup on the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift intoTHIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), the sameway you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, andshift to NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start oridle your engine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press down theclutch pedal, and shift into REVERSE (R). Let upon the clutch pedal slowly while pressing theaccelerator pedal.

To back up a Red Line model vehicle, press downthe clutch pedal, lift up the ring on the shiftlever, and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on theclutch pedal slowly while pressing the acceleratorpedal.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransaxle. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only afteryour vehicle is stopped.

Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parkingbrake, for parking your vehicle.

113

Shift Speeds

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift,you could lose control of your vehicle.You could injure yourself or others.Do not shift down more than one gearat a time when you downshift.

Up-Shift Light

If you have a manualtransaxle, you mayhave an up-shift light.This light, located on theinstrument panelcluster, will show youwhen to shift to the nexthigher gear for thebest fuel economy.

When this light comes on, you can shift to the nexthigher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditionslet you. For the best fuel economy, accelerateslowly and shift when the light comes on.

If you accelerate and decelerate quickly, it isnormal for the light to come on briefly. Ignore thelight when you downshift.

Notice: If you skip more than one gear whenyou downshift, or if you race the enginewhen you release the clutch pedal whiledownshifting, you could damage the engine,clutch, driveshaft, or the transaxle. Do not skipgears or race the engine when downshifting.

For information on operating the illuminated laddertachometer, see Tachometer on page 165.

United States Only

114

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is located between thefront seats.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown and pull up on the parking brake lever. If theignition is on, the brake system warning light onthe instrument panel cluster will come on.See Brake System Warning Light on page 170.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Pull the parking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold the release button inas you move the brake lever all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light is offbefore driving.

115

Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.



To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 259.

1. Hold the brake pedal down and set theparking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holdingthe button on the shift lever and pushing thelever all the way toward the front of thevehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

116

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift leveraway from PARK (P) without first pushing thebutton. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too much force on theparking pawl in the transaxle. You may findit difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock,set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)properly before you leave the driver’s seat.To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle) on page 116.

When you are ready to drive, move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) before you release theparking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, then you will be able to pullthe shift lever out of PARK (P).

117

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockrelease system. You have to fully apply yourregular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)when the ignition is in RUN. See AutomaticTransaxle Operation on page 110.

The shift lock release is designed to do thefollowing:

• Prevent the ignition key from being removedunless the shift lever is in PARK (P), and

• Prevent movement of the shift lever out ofPARK (P) unless the ignition is in a positionother than LOCK. The shift lock releaseis always functional except in the case of adead battery or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever — push the shift lever all theway into PARK (P), as you maintain brakeapplication. Then move the shift lever into thegear you wish. Press the shift lever button beforemoving the shift lever.

Parking Your Vehicle(Manual Transaxle)Before leaving your vehicle, fully press the clutchpedal in, move the shift lever into REVERSE (R),and firmly apply the parking brake. Once theshift lever has been placed in REVERSE (R) withthe clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn theignition key to LOCK, remove the key, and releasethe clutch.

See Manual Transaxle Operation on page 112.

118

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

119

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• The exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system

has been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

120

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 120.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 244.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle) on page 116.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 259.

121

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar®, Compass andTemperature DisplayThe vehicle may have this feature. When on, anautomatic dimming mirror automatically dims to theproper level to minimize glare from lights behindyou after dark.

The mirror also includes a dual display in theupper right corner of the mirror face. The compassreading and the outside temperature will bothappear in the display at the same time.

Y (On/Off): This is the on/off button.

Temperature and Compass DisplayPress the on/off button, located to the farleft, briefly to turn the comp/temp display on or off.

If the display reads CAL, the compass needs tobe calibrated. See the information followingon calibration.

To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius do thefollowing:

1. Press and hold the on/off button forapproximately four seconds until either aflashing °F, or °C appears.

2. Press the button again to change the displayto the desired unit of measurement. Afterapproximately four seconds of inactivity,the new unit will be locked in and thecompass/temperature display will return.

122

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turned onautomatically each time the ignition is started.To operate the automatic dimming mirror do thefollowing:

1. Make sure the green indicator light, located tothe left of the on/off button, is on. If it is not,press and hold the on/off button forapproximately six seconds until the green lightcomes on, indicating that the mirror is inautomatic dimming mode.

2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror functionby pressing and holding the on/off button forapproximately six seconds until the greenindicator light turns off.

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration from timeto time.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in themirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,push in the on/off button for approximatelynine seconds or until CAL is displayed.

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less untilthe display reads a direction, or the word CALdisappears.

123

Compass VarianceThe mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving thefactory. It will be necessary to adjust the compassto compensate for compass variance if you liveoutside of zone eight. Under certain circumstances,as during a long distance cross-country trip, it willbe necessary to adjust for compass variance.Compass variance is the difference between earth’smagnetic north and true geographic north. If notadjusted to account for compass variance, yourcompass could give false readings.

To adjust for compass variance do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zonenumber appears in the display. The compassis now in zone mode.

3. Keep pressing the on/off button until thedesired zone number appears in thedisplay. Release the button. Afterapproximately four seconds of inactivity, thenew zone number will be locked in andthe comp/temp display will return.

124

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith Compass and TemperatureDisplayYour vehicle may be equipped with this mirror.When on, an automatic dimming mirror will dim tothe proper level to minimize glare from lightsbehind you after dark.

The mirror also includes a dual display in theupper right corner of the mirror with the compassreading and the outside temperature.

Yb: This is the compass/temperature button.Briefly press this button to turn the displayon or off.

Temperature DisplayThe temperature can be displayed by pressing thecompass/temperature button. Pressing thecompass/temperature button once briefly,will toggle the display reading on and off.To alternate the temperature reading betweenFahrenheit and Celsius, press and hold thecompass/temperature button for approximatelythree seconds until the display blinks F andC. Press and release the compass/temperaturebutton to toggle between the Fahrenheit andCelsius readings. After approximately five secondsof inactivity, the display will stop blinking anddisplay the last selection made.

Press and release the compass/temperaturebutton to toggle the temperature display betweenFahrenheit or Celsius.

If an abnormal reading is displayed, pleaseconsult your Saturn retailer.

125

Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation

O: Press this button to turn the automaticdimming feature on or off. The indicator light tothe left of the button will turn on to indicate whenthe feature is on. Once the mirror is turned off,it will remain off until it is turned back on, or untilthe vehicle is restarted.

Compass OperationPress the compass/temperature button oncebriefly to turn the display on or off.

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:

• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.

• After approximately five seconds, the displaydoes not show a compass heading, N forNorth, for example, there may be a strongmagnetic field interfering with the compass.Such interference may be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, magnetic note padholder, or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correctheading and the compass zone varianceis set correctly.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in themirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,push in the compass/temperature button forapproximately nine seconds or until CAL isdisplayed.

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

126

Compass VarianceThe mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving thefactory. It will be necessary to adjust the compassto compensate for compass variance if the vehicleis outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,as during a long distance cross-country trip, it willbe necessary to adjust for compass variance.Compass variance is the difference between earth’smagnetic north and true geographic north. If notadjusted to account for compass variance, yourcompass could give false readings.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find your current location and variance zonenumber on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the compass/temperaturebutton for six seconds until a zone numberappears in the display.

3. Press the compass/temperature button on thebottom of the mirror until the new zonenumber appears in the display. After you stoppressing the button, the display will show acompass direction within a few seconds.

127

Cleaning the MirrorUse a paper towel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleanerdirectly on the mirror as that may cause the liquidcleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Outside Remote Control MirrorAdjust the driver’soutside mirror by movingthe control located onthe driver’s door.

The outside rearview mirrors should be adjustedso you can see a little of the side of yourvehicle while you are sitting in a comfortabledriving position.

To adjust the passenger’s outside mirror, sit in thedriver’s seat and have a passenger adjust themirror for you.

Outside Power MirrorsThe controls are locatedon the driver’s doorarmrest.

Move the selector switch to the left or right tochoose the mirror you want to adjust; then pressthe dots located on the four-way control padto adjust the mirror.

128

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat. It also makes thingsappear farther away than they really are.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

129

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You maycancel your OnStar® service at any time bycontacting OnStar® as provided below. A completeOnStar® Owner’s Guide and the OnStar® Termsand Conditions are included in the vehicle’sOnStar® Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca,contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, orpress the OnStar® button to speak with anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®,the Safe & Sound Plan, or the Directions &Connections® Plan is included for one yearfrom the date of purchase. You can extendthis plan beyond the first year, or upgradeto the Directions & Connections® Plan.

For more information, press the OnStar® button tospeak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

Available Services with Safe &Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

130

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be usedwith OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or aBell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speakwith an OnStar® advisor by pressing theOnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, you canbrowse through the various topics. See theOnStar® Owner’s Guide for more information.(Only available in the continental U.S.)

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may be equipped with a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interact with OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

131

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS locationand, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unless

you are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that area hascoverage, network capacity and reception whenthe service is needed, and technology that iscompatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

132

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe blue OnStar® button to confirm that yourOnStar® equipment is active.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by pulling back on the lever.Close the glove box with a firm push.

Cupholder(s)Your vehicle may have cupholders between therear seats.

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle has a center console storage areabetween the front seats. It contains a storage areafor small items.

The center console storage area can be used asan armrest. Push the lid of the center consoleforward for additional arm support.

133

Roof Rack SystemYour vehicle may have a roof rack system.

{CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top ofyour vehicle that is longer or wider thanthe luggage carrier — like paneling,plywood, a mattress and so forth — thewind can catch it as you drive along. Thiscan cause you to lose control. What youare carrying could be violently torn off,and this could cause you or other driversto have a collision, and of course damageyour vehicle. You may be able to carrysomething like this inside. But, nevercarry something longer or wider than theluggage carrier on top of your vehicle.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrierthat weighs more than 100 lbs (45 kg) orhangs over the rear or sides of the vehiclemay damage your vehicle. Load cargo so thatit rests on the slats as far forward aspossible and against the side rails, makingsure to fasten it securely.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacitywhen loading your vehicle. For more informationon vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading YourVehicle on page 250.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you aredriving, check frequently to ensure your cargois securely fastened.

Convenience NetYour vehicle may have a convenience net. Itattaches to the floor of the trunk. Put small loadsbehind the net.

The net is not for heavier loads. Store them as farforward in the trunk as you can.

See your retailer for information on obtaining aconvenience net.

134

Sunroof

If the vehicle has asunroof, the switch thatoperates it is locatedon the headlinerbetween the map lamps.

The sunroof will only operate while the ignition ison, or turned to ACC, or if Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 108.

Press the sunroof switch rearward to open thesunroof to the vent position. If the sunshadeis closed, it must be opened manually in the ventposition. Press and hold the switch rearward asecond time to open the sunroof. If the sunshadeis closed, it will open automatically when thesunroof is opened.

To close the sunroof, press the switch forward andhold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroofwill stop if the switch is released. Close thesunshade by hand.

The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has an electrical failure.

Notice: If you force the sunshade forward ofthe sliding glass panel, damage will occurand the sunroof may not open or closeproperly. Always close the glass panel beforeclosing the sunshade.

135

✍ NOTES

136

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 140Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 142Other Warning Devices ............................. 142Horn .......................................................... 142Tilt Wheel .................................................. 142Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 143Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 144Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 145Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 145Windshield Washer .................................... 145Windshield Wiper Lever ............................. 146Cruise Control ........................................... 147Headlamps ................................................ 150Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 151Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 151Fog Lamps ................................................ 152Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 152Dome Lamp .............................................. 153Entry Lighting ............................................ 153Map Lamps ............................................... 153Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 153Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 153Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 154

Climate Controls ......................................... 155Climate Control System

(Without Air Conditioning) ....................... 155Climate Control System

(With Air Conditioning) ........................... 157Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 160Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 161

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 163Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 164Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 165Trip Odometer ........................................... 165Tachometer ............................................... 165Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 166Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 166Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 167Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 168Battery Warning Light ................................ 170Up-Shift Light ............................................ 170Brake System Warning Light ..................... 170Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 172Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 173Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 174

Section 3 Instrument Panel

137

Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 177Passlock® Warning Light ............................ 178Reduced Engine Power Light .................... 178Highbeam On Light ................................... 179Fuel Gage ................................................. 179Boost Gage ............................................... 180

Message Center .......................................... 182Low Traction Message .............................. 182Traction Off Message ................................ 182Cruise Control Message ............................ 183Transaxle Fluid Hot Message .................... 183Change Engine Oil Message ..................... 183Check Gage Message ............................... 184Power Steering Message ........................... 184Trunk Ajar Warning Message .................... 184

Check Gas Cap Message ......................... 185Low Fuel Warning Message ...................... 185Error Message ........................................... 185

Audio System(s) ......................................... 186Setting the Time (Without Date Display) .... 187Setting the Time (With Date Display) ......... 188Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 190Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 195Using an MP3 ........................................... 205XM Radio Messages ................................. 212Radio Reception ........................................ 214Care of Your CDs ..................................... 215Care of the CD Player .............................. 215Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 215XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 215

Section 3 Instrument Panel

138

✍ NOTES

139

Instrument Panel Overview

140

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 160.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 143.

C. Horn. See Horn on page 142.D. Windshield Wiper Lever. See Windshield Wiper

Lever on page 146.E. Boost Gage. See Boost Gage on page 180.F. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard

Warning Flashers on page 142.G. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument

Panel Cluster on page 164.H. Enhanced Traction System (ETS) (If Equipped).

See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 226.

I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 186.

J. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 279.

K. Trunk Release Button. See Trunk on page 98.L. Fog Lamp (If Equipped)/Dimmer Switch.

See Fog Lamps on page 152 and InstrumentPanel Brightness on page 152.

M. Cruise Control Switches. See Cruise Control onpage 147.

N. Climate Control System. See Climate ControlSystem (Without Air Conditioning) on page 155or Climate Control System (With AirConditioning) on page 157.

O. Transaxle Shift Lever. See Automatic TransaxleOperation on page 110 or Manual TransaxleOperation on page 112 Manual TransaxleOperation.

P. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 168.

Q. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 133.

141

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers let you warn thepolice and others that you have a problem. Thefront and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turnsignals do not work.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition the key is in, and even if the key is notin the ignition switch.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set themup at the side of the road about 300 feet(100 m) behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. You can raise it to the highestlevel to give your legs more room when youexit and enter the vehicle.

142

The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheelis located on the left side of the steering column.

To tilt the wheel, pull the lever down. Then, movethe wheel to a comfortable position and raisethe lever to lock the wheel in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• Turn and Lane-Change Signals

• Headlamps

• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

• Flash-to-Pass Feature

For additional information on the exterior lamps,see Headlamps on page 150.

143

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower thelever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold itthere until you complete your lane change. Thelever will return by itself when you release it.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if thearrows flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burnedout and other drivers will not see your turnsignal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all when yousignal a turn, check the fuse, see Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 375 and for burned-out bulbs.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile(1.6 km), a chime will sound to let you know youleft the turn signal on.

144

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerPush the turn signal lever forward to changethe headlamps from low beam to high beam. Pullthe turn signal lever back and then release itto change from high beam to low beam.

When the high beamsare on, this light on theinstrument panelcluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you until the high-beam headlampscome on, then release the lever to turn them off.

Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

L (Washer Fluid): Pull the windshield wiperlever toward you to operate the windshield wipers.Washer fluid will squirt onto the windshield andthe wipers will run for a few cycles to clearthe windshield. For more wash cycles, pull thelever toward you and hold it there.

145

Windshield Wiper Lever

The lever on the right side of the steering columnoperates the windshield wipers.

7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it fora single wiping cycle. The lever will return to itsoriginal position. For more cycles, hold thelever down before releasing it.

9 (Off): Put the lever in this position to turn offthe wipers.

& (Delay): Put the lever in this position to set adelay between wipes. Turn the end of the leverto set the length of the delay.

6 (Low Speed): Put the lever in this positionfor slow, steady wiping cycles.

1 (High Speed): Put the lever in this positionfor rapid wiping cycles.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they are frozen to thewindshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If theblades do become damaged, install new blades orblade inserts.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until itcools down. Clear away snow or ice to preventan overload.

146

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

The cruise control buttons are located on thesteering wheel.

147

J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruisecontrol system on and off.

+RES (Resume): Press this part of the button toresume a set speed and to accelerate the speed.

−SET (Set): Press this part of the button to set aspeed and to decrease the speed.

To set a speed do the following:

1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise controlon. The indicator light on the button willcome on.

2. Get to the speed you want.

3. Press the −SET part of the control button andrelease it. The CRUISE message will displayin the instrument panel cluster to show thesystem is engaged.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

When the brakes are applied, the cruise controlshuts off.

If the vehicle is in cruise control and the EnhancedTraction System (ETS) begins to limit wheelspin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS)on page 226. When road conditions allow, thecruise control can be used again.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This, ofcourse, disengages the cruise control. TheCRUISE message in the instrument panel clusterwill also go out indicating cruise is no longerengaged. To return to your previously set speed,you do not need to go through the set processagain. Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h)or more, you can press the +RES part of thebutton briefly.

This will take you back up to your previouslychosen speed and stay there.

148

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed.

• Disengage the cruise control but do not turn itoff. Accelerate to a higher speed and resetthe cruise control.

• If the cruise control system is already engaged,press the +RES part of the button. Hold it thereuntil you get up to the speed you want, andthen release the button. To increase yourspeed in very small amounts, press the +RESpart of the button briefly and then release it.Each time you do this, your vehicle will goabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlIf the cruise control system is already engaged,

• Push and hold the −SET part of the buttonuntil you reach the lower speed you want,then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, push the−SET part of the button briefly. Each time youdo this, you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, yourvehicle will slow down to the cruise control speedyou set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon your speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the accelerator pedalto maintain your speed. When going downhill, youmay have to brake or shift to a lower gear tokeep your speed down. Of course, applying thebrake takes you out of cruise control. Many driversfind this to be too much trouble and do not usecruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlTo end the cruise control session, step lightly onthe brake pedal or tap the clutch if your vehicle hasa manual transaxle.Stepping on the brake pedal or clutch will only endthe current cruise control session. Press thecruise control on/off button to turn the systemcompletely off.

149

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or theignition, your cruise control set speed memory iserased.

HeadlampsThe exterior lamp control is located in the middleof the turn signal/multifunction lever.

O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the controlwith this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has the followingfour positions:

9 (Off): Turn the control to this position to turnoff all lamps, except the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). On some vehicles, this positionactivates the automatic headlamp system.

AUTO (Automatic): If the vehicle has automaticheadlamps, turning the control to this positionputs the headlamps in automatic mode. AUTOmode will turn the exterior lamps on and offdepending upon how much light is availableoutside of the vehicle.

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn on the headlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

Lamps On ReminderIf you open the driver’s door with the ignition offand the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.

150

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.The DRL system will make the turn signallamps come on in daylight when the followingconditions are met:• The ignition is on.• The exterior lamp band is in the off or AUTO

position.When the DRL are on, the turn signal lamps willbe on. The taillamps, sidemarker, and other lampswill not be on. The instrument panel backlighting will not be on either.When the exterior lamp band is turned to theheadlamp position, the headlamps will come on.The other lamps that come on with the headlampswill also come on.When the headlamps are turned off, the regularlamps will go off, and the turn signal lampswill come on.

Automatic Headlamp SystemIf you have the automatic headlamps system, theheadlamps will come on automatically when itis dark enough.

Your vehicle may havea light sensor locatedon top of the instrumentpanel. Make sure it isnot covered, or theheadlamps will come onwhen you do notneed them.

The system may also turn on the headlamps whendriving through a parking garage or tunnel.

151

Fog LampsIf your vehicle has this feature, use your fog lampsfor better visibility in foggy or misty conditions.

The button for your foglamps is located next tothe instrument panelbrightness control.

Push the button to turn the fog lamps on or off.

When using fog lamps, the parking lamps orlow-beam headlamps must be on.

A light on the button will come on when the foglamps are on. The fog lamps will go off wheneverthe high-beam headlamps come on. When thehigh-beam headlamps go off, the fog lampswill come on again.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel BrightnessThis feature controls the brightness of theinstrument panel lights.

The thumbwheel forthis feature is locatedon the instrument panelto the left of thesteering column.

Turn the thumbwheel to the right to brighten thelights or to the left to dim them.

152

Dome LampThe dome lamp switch has three positions.

ON: The lamp will stay on as long as the switchis in this position.

DOOR: The lamp will come on when a door isopened. See “Entry Lighting” for more information.

OFF: The lamp will not come on as long as theswitch is in this position.

Entry LightingIf the dome lamp is to DOOR, the lamps insideyour vehicle will come on when any door isopened. In addition, the light will come on whenthe Remote Keyless Entry Unlock button ison. It will stay on for 20 seconds or until a door isopened. After the door is opened the light willremain on and stay on for 20 seconds afterthe doors are closed, or until you put the key inthe ignition and turn the key to RUN. The light willthen gradually dim until it is no longer lit.

Map LampsThese lamps are located on the headliner abovethe rearview mirror. To turn the lamps on, press thelens. Press the lens again to turn them off.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle has a battery saver feature designedto protect the vehicle’s battery.

When any interior lamp is left on and the ignitionis turned off, the battery rundown protectionsystem automatically turns the lamp off after20 minutes. This prevents draining of the battery.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)The accessory power outlets can be used toconnect electrical equipment such as a cellularphone or CB radio.

The accessory power outlets are located in themiddle and rear of the center console.

The front accessory power outlet has electricalpower available to it all the time. The rearaccessory power outlet only has electrical powerwhen the ignition key is turned on or the vehicle isoperating on Retained Accessory Power (RAP).See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) onpage 108.

153

To use the outlet, remove the cover. When not inuse, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery.Always turn off electrical equipment when notin use and do not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 15 ampere rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your retailer foradditional information on the accessorypower outlet.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Check with your retailer beforeadding electrical equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarettelighter. To use the lighter, just push it in all the wayand let go. When it is ready for use, it will popback out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperage rating of15 amperes.

To remove the ashtray, lift it straight up. Toreinstall it, press the ashtray down firmly until it isfully seated.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle.Never put flammable items in the ashtray.

154

Climate Controls

Climate Control System(Without Air Conditioning)With this system you can control the heating andventilation for your vehicle.

OperationTo change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximatelyhalf of the air to the instrument panel outlets,and then directs the remaining air to thefloor outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upperoutlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to thewindshield.

The left knob can also be used to select defog ordefrost mode. Information on defogging anddefrosting can be found later in this section.

A (Fan): Turn the center knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. In any setting other than off, the fanwill run continuously with the ignition on.

9 (Off): To turn the fan off, turn the knob all theway counterclockwise to the off position.

Temperature Control: Turn the right knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the temperature inside your vehicle.

155

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield and side windows. Use the defog modeto clear the windows of fog or moisture andwarm the passengers. Use the defrost mode toremove fog or frost from the windshield morequickly. For best results, clear all snow and icefrom the windshield before defrosting.

Turn the left knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode directs half of the air tothe windshield and the side window outletsand half to the floor outlets. To defog the windowsfaster, turn the temperature control knobclockwise to the warmest setting.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield, with some air directed to theside window outlets and the floor outlets.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in RUN.

< (Rear): Press the button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. Be sure to clear asmuch snow from the rear window as possible.An indicator light above the button will come on tolet you know that the rear window defogger isactivated.The rear window defogger will turn offapproximately 15 minutes after the button ispressed. If turned on again, the defogger will onlyrun for approximately five minutes before turningoff. The defogger can also be turned off by pressingthe button again or by turning off the engine.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

156

Climate Control System(With Air Conditioning)With this system you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.

OperationTo change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximatelyhalf of the air to the instrument panel outlets,and then directs the remaining air to thefloor outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upperoutlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to thewindshield.

The left knob can also be used to select defog ordefrost mode. Information on defogging anddefrosting can be found later in this section.

A (Fan): Turn the center knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. In any setting other than off, the fanwill run continuously with the ignition on. The fanmust be turned on to run the air conditioningcompressor.

157

9 (Off): To turn the fan off, turn the knob all theway counterclockwise to the off position.

Temperature Control: Turn the right knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the temperature inside your vehicle.

> (Recirculate): This mode keeps outside airfrom coming in the vehicle. It can be used toprevent outside air and odors from entering yourvehicle or to help heat or cool the air insideyour vehicle more quickly. An indicator light willcome on in this mode. The air-conditioningcompressor also comes on. Operation in this modeduring periods of high humidity and cool outsidetemperatures may result in increased windowfogging. If window fogging is experienced, selectthe defrost mode.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air-conditioning system on or off. Whenthis button is pressed, an indicator light above thebutton will come on to let you know the airconditioning is activated.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days:

1. Select the recirculation mode.

2. Select air conditioning.

3. Select the coolest temperature.

4. Select the highest fan speed.

Using these settings together for long periods oftime may cause the air inside of your vehicle tobecome too dry. To prevent this from happening,after the air in your vehicle has cooled, turn off therecirculation by pressing the button again.

158

The air-conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath yourvehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield and side windows. Use the defog modeto clear the windows of fog or moisture andwarm the passengers. Use the defrost mode toremove fog or frost from the windshield morequickly. For best results, clear all snow and icefrom the windshield before defrosting.

Turn the left knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode directs half of the air to thewindshield and the side window outlets and half tothe floor outlets. When you select this mode thesystem runs the air-conditioning compressor. Todefog the windows faster, turn the temperaturecontrol knob clockwise to the warmest setting.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield, with some air directed to theside window outlets and the floor outlets. Whenyou select this mode the system runs theair-conditioning compressor.

159

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in RUN.

< (Rear): Press the button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. Be sure to clear asmuch snow from the rear window as possible.An indicator light above the button will come on tolet you know that the rear window defogger isactivated.

The rear window defogger will turn offapproximately 15 minutes after the button ispressed. If turned on again, the defogger will onlyrun for approximately five minutes before turningoff. The defogger can also be turned off by pressingthe button again or by turning off the engine.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the louvers located on the air outlets tochange the direction of the airflow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the vehicle that mayblock the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Do not use any non-GM approved hooddeflectors that could adversely affect theperformance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

160

Passenger Compartment Air FilterPassenger compartment air is routed througha passenger compartment filter. The filter removescertain particles from the air, including pollenand dust particles. Reductions in airflow, whichmay occur more quickly in dusty areas, indicatethat the filter needs to be replaced early.

The filter should be replaced as part of routinescheduled maintenance. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 391 for replacementintervals. See your retailer for details on changingthe filter. To find out what type of filter to use,see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts onpage 404.

To access the passenger compartment air filteryou must go through the glove box.

1. Open the glove box and remove all articlesfrom the inside.

2. Locate the doorstop insulators on each side ofthe glove box and remove them.

3. Tilt the glove box door down by squeezing oneach side of the glove box until the door canbe lowered from its track. Lower the glovebox door completely.

161

4. Open the passenger compartment air filterdoor by reaching through the opening in theback of the glove box and raising the tab untilthe door can be opened downward.

5. Remove the filter by sliding it out of thehousing.

6. Install the new filter with the AIR FLOW arrowpointing downward.

Reverse Steps 1 through 5 making sure the glovebox door snaps back into place.

162

Warning Lights, Gages,and IndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages onyour vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to the warning lights and gages could alsosave you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As the details show on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you startthe engine just to let you know they are working.If you are familiar with this section, you shouldnot be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to let youknow when there is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on as you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly and even dangerous.So please get to know your vehicle’s warning lightsand gages. They can be a big help.

Your vehicle also has a message center thatworks along with the warning lights and gages.See Message Center on page 182 for moreinformation.

163

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You willknow how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will needto know to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

164

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometers perhour (km/h).

Your odometer is located in your message center,and shows how far your vehicle has beendriven, in either miles (used in the United States)or kilometers (used in Canada).

When information messages need to be shown inthe message center, they will be shown inplace of the odometer. To display the odometerafter a message(s) is shown, clear each messageby pressing the trip/reset button located to theright of the speedometer. See Message Center onpage 182 for more information.

Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.You may wonder what happens if your vehicleneeds a new odometer installed. If the new onecan be set to the mileage total of the old odometer,then that will be done. If not, it will be set atzero and a label must be put on the driver’s doorto show the old mileage reading when the newodometer was installed. If the mileage is unknown,the label should then indicate “previous mileageunknown”.

Trip OdometerYour trip odometer shows how far your vehicle hasbeen driven since the trip odometer was last reset.To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and holdthe trip/reset button for about two seconds.

TachometerThe tachometerdisplays the enginespeed in revolutionsper minute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, yourvehicle could be damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

165

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, achime will come on for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts, unless thedriver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for severalseconds, then it willflash for several more.

If the vehicle has the passenger sensing system,the chime and light will be repeated if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither thechime nor the light will come on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 77 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light willbe repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

166

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light tells you if thereis an electrical problem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensor, the airbag modules,the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System on page 68.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

167

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorIf your vehicle has one of the indicators pictured inthe following illustrations, then your vehicle hasa passenger sensing system.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.


168

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 77 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your retailer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 167.

169

Battery Warning Light

The battery warning lightwill come on briefly as acheck, when you turn onthe ignition. Then itshould go out when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on when you start yourvehicle, have your vehicle serviced right away. Thiscondition may indicate your battery warning light isnot functioning properly. If this light comes on whileyou are driving, be sure to turn off accessories suchas the radio and climate control system. Have yourvehicle serviced right away.

Up-Shift LightYour vehicle may have an up-shift light. When thislight comes on, you should shift to the nexthigher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditionsallow you to.

This light is located inyour instrument panelcluster to the left ofthe speedometer.

See Manual Transaxle Operation on page 112 formore information.

Brake System Warning Light

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition to RUN. If it does not come onthen, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

United States Only


170

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the brake system warning light comes on,there is a brake problem. Have your brake systeminspected right away.

When the ignition is on, the BRAKE light will comeon when you set your parking brake. The lightwill stay on if your parking brake does not releasefully. A chime will also sound if the parkingbrake is not fully released and the vehicle ismoving. If it stays on after your parking brake isfully released, it means you have a brake problem.

The BRAKE light will also come on to indicate alow brake fluid level. See Brakes on page 308for more information.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push or the pedal maygo closer to the floor. It may take longer tostop. Make sure the parking brake is fully released.Turn the ignition off and wait several seconds torestart vehicle, if the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. See Towing YourVehicle on page 256.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

171

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning LightIf your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, the anti-lockbrake system (ABS) warning light will comeon briefly, as a check, when you start your vehicle.If it does not, have your vehicle serviced so thatthe light works properly when it needs to.

The ABS light is locatedin the instrument panelcluster, to the left ofthe engine coolanttemperature gage.

If the light stays on longer than a few secondsafter you start your engine, or comes on and stayson while you are driving, try resetting the system.

To reset the system, do the following:

1. If you are driving, pull over when it is safe todo so.

2. Be sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the ignition.

4. Then restart the engine.

If the light remains on after resetting the system orcomes on again while driving, your vehicleneeds service. If the ABS light is on, but theregular brake system warning light is not on, theanti-lock brakes are not working properly, butthe regular brakes are still functioning. Have yourvehicle serviced right away. If both brake lightsare on, you do not have anti-lock brakes, andthere’s a problem with your regular brakes as well.Have your vehicle towed for service. See TowingYour Vehicle on page 256.

The anti-lock brake system warning light shouldcome on briefly when you turn the ignitionkey to RUN. If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if thereis a problem.

172

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage measures thetemperature of thevehicle’s engine coolant.

If the pointer moves into the shaded area, yourengine is too hot, the CHK GAGE messagewill appear and a chime will sound to alert you tothe engine coolant temperature gage. SeeCheck Gage Message on page 184 for moreinformation. If you have been operating yourvehicle under normal driving conditions, you shouldpull off the road and stop your vehicle, be surethe air conditioning is off, let the engine idle for afew minutes, then turn off the engine.

On vehicles with the 2.2L engine, under severeconditions – hot ambient temperature, steepgrades and towing – your vehicle may experiencemore transaxle shifting to avoid engine coolantoverheating. This is temporary and normal underthese conditions. This does not require engineor transaxle service.

If your engine control system detects a failure inthe engine coolant temperature circuit, themalfunction indicator lamp light will come on. Thecoolant gage may read all the way hot or cold.The engine cooling fan will be turned on to protectthe engine and transaxle. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 174 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the engine coolanttemperature gage indicator in the shaded areacould cause your vehicle to overheat. Yourvehicle could be damaged, and it might not becovered by your warranty. Never drive withthe engine coolant temperature gage indicatorin the shaded area.

173

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, the emission controlsmight not work as well, your vehicle’s fueleconomy might not be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. This could leadto costly repairs that might not be covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 270.

174

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon as it ispossible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your retailer for service assoon as possible.

175

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 275.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle ofwater?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 272. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your retailer can check the vehicle. Yourretailer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

176

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know in orderto help your vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your retailercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

If you have a low engineoil pressure problem,this light will stay on afteryou start your engine, orcome on when you aredriving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil.

The engine could be low on oil, or could havesome other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.

177

The oil light may also come on when the ignitionis on but the engine is not running, the lightwill come on as a test to show you it is working,but the light will go out when you turn theignition to START. If it does not come on with theignition on, you may have a problem with thefuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

Passlock® Warning LightYour vehicle has aPasslock®

theft-deterrent system.With this system, thesecurity light will flash asyou open the door if yourignition is off.

For more information, see Passlock® on page 103.

Reduced Engine Power Light

This light will come onbriefly when you startthe engine.

This light, along with the service engine soon lightwill be displayed when a noticeable reduction inthe vehicle’s performance may occur. Stop thevehicle and turn off the ignition. Wait for10 seconds and restart your vehicle. This maycorrect the condition.

178

The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speedwhen the reduced engine power light is onbut acceleration and speed may be reduced.The performance may be reduced until the nexttime you drive your vehicle. If this light stayson, see your retailer as soon as possiblefor diagnosis and repair.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 145.

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on,the fuel gage on theright tells you about howmuch fuel you haveleft in your tank.

When the indicator nears empty, the LOW FUELmessage will come on. You still have a littlefuel left, but you should get more soon. See LowFuel Warning Message on page 185 for moreinformation.

179

Here are four things that some owners ask about.None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

• At the service station, the fuel pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or less than half thetank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage moves a little when you turn a corneror speed up.

• The gage takes a few seconds to stabilize afterthe ignition is turned on, and will go back toempty when you turn the ignition off.

For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 384.

Boost Gage

United States

180

If your vehicle has this gage, it is located on thesteering column.

This gage indicates vacuum during light tomoderate throttle and boost under heavier throttle.

This gage displays the air pressure level in theintake manifold before it enters the engine’scombustion chamber.

This gage is automatically centered at zero everytime the ignition is turned to RUN. Actualvacuum or boost is displayed from this zero point.

The boost gage has three pairs of lights thatare located on each side of the gage. These lightsare used to indicate three different engine rpmlevels. The default setting for the lower pairof lights is 4,400 rpm, the middle pair of lights is5,600 rpm, and the top pair of lights is 6,200 rpm.These settings can be adjusted by turning thestem behind each light. To have the lightpair come on at a higher rpm level, turn the stemcounterclockwise. To have the light pair comeon at a lower rpm level, turn the stem clockwise.Each detent adjusts the settings by 100 rpm.To restore the default settings, press and hold anystem for three seconds. The lights will flashthree times.

To turn the lights off or on, press and releaseany stem.

Canada

181

Message CenterThe message center is located in the instrumentpanel cluster. It gives you important safetyand maintenance facts.If there are several messages, each message willbe shown for a few seconds and will continueto repeat until cleared. To clear a message, pressthe trip/reset button while the message youwant to clear is being displayed.Many messages will also cause a chime to sound,to alert you to the message.

Changing the Language (Canada Only)Vehicles first sold in Canada have instrument panelclusters that show messages in either English orFrench. To change the language, do the following:1. Turn the ignition on.2. Press the trip/reset button until the current

language of ENGLISH or FRENCH isdisplayed.

3. Press and hold the trip/reset button forseveral seconds until the language ischanged.

4. Press the trip/reset button to return to theodometer display.

Low Traction Message

If your vehicle has anenhanced tractionsystem (ETS), this LOWTRAC message willbe displayed when thesystem is limitingwheel spin.

See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 226 for more information.

Traction Off Message

If your vehicle has anenhanced tractionsystem (ETS), thisTRAC OFF messagewill be displayed brieflywhen the systemhas been turned off.

See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 226 for more information.

182

Cruise Control Message

The CRUISE messageis displayed briefly whenyour cruise controlsystem has beenactivated, or set to adesired speed.

See Cruise Control on page 147 for moreinformation.

Transaxle Fluid Hot Message

If the TRANS HOTmessage is displayed,the automatic transaxlefluid may beoverheating.

See Engine Overheating on page 297 for moreinformation.

Change Engine Oil Message

When the CHG OILmessage is displayed, itmeans that service isrequired for yourvehicle.

See Scheduled Maintenance on page 391 andEngine Oil on page 283 for more information.

183

Check Gage Message

If the CHK GAGEmessage is displayed,the engine coolantmay be overheated.A chime will also soundto alert you to thismessage.

If this message is displayed, check your enginecoolant temperature gage. If the needle is inthe red area, your engine may be overheating.See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage onpage 173 and Engine Overheating on page 297for more information.

Notice: Driving with either the CHK GAGEmessage or the COOLANT message displayedin the message center and the EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on your instrumentpanel in the red zone could cause yourvehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 297. Your vehicle could be damagedand the damages might not be covered by yourwarranty.

Power Steering Message

If the PWR STRmessage is displayed,a problem has beendetected with theelectric power steering.

If you suspect electric power steering problemsand/or the PWR STR message is on, seeyour retailer for service and repair.

Trunk Ajar Warning Message

When the TRUNKmessage is displayed, itmeans the trunk lid isnot fully closed.

184

Check Gas Cap Message

This message will comeon when the ignition ison and the gas capis open.

Low Fuel Warning Message

When the LOW FUELmessage is displayed,you may have lessthan 1.5 gallons(5.5 liters) of fuel left.

A chime will also sound to alert you to thismessage. You should refuel your vehicleimmediately. When the fuel tank is filled to morethan 3.3 gallons (11.5 liters), this messagewill no longer be displayed.

Error Message

When the ERRORmessage is displayed,there is a problemwith your odometersystem.

See your retailer for service and repair if thismessage is displayed.

185

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 218. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which you canhelp avoid distraction while driving.While your vehicle is parked:• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.• Familiarize yourself with its operation.• Set up your audio system by presetting your

favorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

186

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer/retailer. Also, checkfederal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them. Yourvehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 108 for more information.

Setting the Time (Without DateDisplay)If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with asingle CD player and preset buttons numberedone through six, the radio has a clock buttonfor setting the time. You can set the timeby following these steps:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) orRUN. Press the power knob, located in thecenter of the radio, to turn the radio on.

2. Press the clock button until the hour numbersbegin flashing on the display. Press the clockbutton a second time and the minutenumbers begin flashing on the display.

3. While either the hour or the minute numbersare flashing, turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio, clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decreasethe time.

187

4. Press the clock button again until the clockdisplay stops flashing to set the currentlydisplayed time; otherwise, the flashing stopsafter five seconds and the current timedisplayed will be automatically set.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour, press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrow label.Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed,press the pushbutton located under the desiredoption to select the default. Press the clock buttonagain to apply the selected default, or let thescreen time out.

Setting the Time (With Date Display)If your vehicle has a radio with a single CDplayer, the radio has a clock button for setting thetime and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:


2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, andyear) displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under anyone of the labels that you want to change.Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,the time or the date if selected, increasesby one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease the time or date, press the leftSEEK arrow or REV (reverse) button, orturn the tune knob, located on theupper right side of the radio.

The date does not automatically display. To seethe date press the clock button while the radiois on. The date with display times out after a fewseconds and goes back to the normal radioand time display.

If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, the radio has a MENU button instead ofthe clock button to set the time and date.

188

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:


2. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption is displayed.

3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.

4. Press the pushbutton located under anyone of the labels that you want to change.Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,the time or the date if selected, increasesby one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease the time or date, press the leftSEEK arrow or REV (reverse) button, orturn the tune knob, located on theupper right side of the radio.

The date does not automatically display. To seethe date press the MENU button and then theclock button while the radio is on. The date withdisplay times out after a few seconds andgoes back to the normal radio and time display.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or to change the date default settingfrom month/day/year to day/month/year, followthese instructions:

1. Press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrowlabel. Once the time 12H and 24H, andthe date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the clock or MENU button again toapply the selected default, or let the screentime out.

189

Radio with CD (Base)

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise to increase orcounterclockwise to decrease the volume.

The radio remembers the previous volumesetting whenever the radio is turned on. You canstill manually adjust the volume by using thevolume knob.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2 or AM. The display will show the selection.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequencyand the time. When the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time.

190

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:1. Turn the radio on.2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.3. Tune in the desired station.4. Press and hold one of the six numbered

pushbuttons for three seconds until a beepsounds. Whenever that pushbutton is pressedand released, the station that was set, returns.

5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for eachpushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bassor treble, press the tune knob or EQ buttonuntil the desired tone control label appears on thedisplay. Turn the tune knob clockwise toincrease or counterclockwise to decrease thesetting. The display shows the current bassor treble level. If a station’s frequency is weak, orif there is static, decrease the treble.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to adjustBASS and TREBLE Settings.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust thebalance or fade, press this button or the tune knobuntil the desired speaker control label appearson the display. Turn the tune knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to adjust the setting.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for your vehicleand it must be returned to your retailer for service.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playingwhere it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

191

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appearson the radio display. As each new track startsto play, the track number appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There may be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 215 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, use onlyCDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.

If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectthe CD. If the CD is not removed, after severalseconds, the CD automatically pulls back intothe player.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrowis held or pressed multiple times, the playercontinues moving backward or forward throughthe CD.

192

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thisbutton to resume playing the track. The elapsedtime of the track appears on the display.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and holdthis button to advance playback quickly within atrack. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing thetrack. The elapsed time of the track appears onthe display.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen toCD tracks in random, rather than sequentialorder. To use random, do the following:

1. To play tracks from the CD you arelistening to in random order, press the RDMpushbutton. The random icon appears onthe display.

2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play. The random icon disappearsfrom the display.

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track can berepeated (played over and over).

To repeat the track you are listening to, press andrelease the RPT button. An arrow symbolappears on the display. Press RPT again to turnoff repeat play.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the track number, elapsed time ofthe track, and the time. When the ignition is off,press this button to display the time.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CD remains safelyinside the radio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when a portable audio device is playing.

Your radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.Connect an external audio device such as aportable MP3 audio player to the auxiliary inputjack for use as another source for audio listening.

Press the CD/AUX button again and the systemwill begin playing audio from the connectedportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Aux” displays.

193

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could befor one of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There may have been a problem whileburning the CD-R.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your retailer when reporting theproblem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in park (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 218 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the car speakers.

194

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise toincrease or counterclockwise to decrease thevolume of the portable player. You may needto do additional volume adjustments from theportable device if the volume does not go loud orsoft enough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmay want to stop it or power it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Aux” displays.

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).The RDS feature is available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information.

Radio with CD shown,Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar

195

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. While the radio istuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name orcall letters appear on the display. In rare cases, aradio station may broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display showsthe selection.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

196

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text information relatedto the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3song. A choice of additional information such as:Channel, Song, Artist, CAT (category) may appear.Continue pressing the information button tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under any one of the labels and theinformation about that label is displayed.

When information is not available, No Info displays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune toyour favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls (if equipped).See Defensive Driving on page 218.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stationscan be programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. Whenever thatpushbutton is pressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

197

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, orTreble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble,press the tune knob until the tone control labelsappear on the display. Continue pressing tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under the desired label. Turn thetune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjustthe highlighted setting. You can also adjust thehighlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK,FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) button untilthe desired levels are obtained. If a station’sfrequency is weak, or if there is static, decreasethe treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and the leveladjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

198

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual displays or start to manuallyadjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the tune knob until the speakercontrol labels appear on the display. Continuepressing to highlight the desired label, or press thepushbutton positioned under the desired label.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the highlighted setting. You can alsoadjust the highlighted setting by pressing either theSEEK, FWD, or REV button until the desiredlevels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds. Abeep sounds and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob for morethan two seconds until a beep sounds.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency is displayed. Press the CAT buttonto display the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name is displayed.

2. Press either of the two buttons belowthe desired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated withthat category.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

199

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category is displayed or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

The radio does not allow you to remove or addcategories while the vehicle is moving faster thanfive mph (eight km/h).

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for yourvehicle and it must be returned to your retailerfor service.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 212 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

200

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the load button.

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds. A beep sounds and Load AllDiscs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playingwhere it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appearson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There may be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 215 for more information.


201



If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. Ifthe CD is not removed, after several seconds,the CD automatically pulls back into the player andbegins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold theeject button for two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrowis held, or pressed multiple times, the playercontinues moving backward or forward through thetracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thisbutton to resume playing the track. The elapsedtime of the track appears on the display.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing thetrack. The elapsed time of the track appearson the display.

202

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen tothe tracks in random, rather than sequentialorder, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CDplayer. To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks from the CD you are listeningto in random order, press the pushbuttonpositioned under the RDM label until RandomCurrent Disc is displayed. Press the pushbuttonagain to turn off random play.

• To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CD remains safelyinside the radio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand track number appears on the display when aCD is in the player.

Your radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.You can connect an external audio device such asa portable audio player to the auxiliary inputjack for use as another source for playing CDs.

Press the CD/AUX button again and the systembegins playing audio from the connected portableaudio player. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found” displays.

Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscIf your radio system has a single CD (MP3) playeror a six-disc CD (MP3) player, it is capable ofplaying an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For moreinformation on how to play an MP3 CD-R orCD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 205 laterin this section.

203

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could befor one of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There may have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your retailer when reportingthe problem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in park (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 218 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the car speakers.

204

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise toincrease or counterclockwise to decrease thevolume of the portable player. You may need todo additional volume adjustments from theportable device if the volume does not go loud orsoft enough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device will continue playing, so youmay want to stop it or power it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found” displays.

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recordedwith the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.Song title, artist name, and album can displaywhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3files. By default the radio reads only theuncompressed audio and ignores the MP3 files.Pressing the CAT (category) button togglesbetween compressed and uncompressedaudio format.

205

MP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• The CD player is able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in trying tolocate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension (other file extensions may not work).

• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number of files andfolders, or playlists can cause the player to beunable to play up to the maximum number offiles, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wishto play a large number of files, folders, playlists,or sessions, minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist name. Long names also takeup more space on the display, and might notfully display.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disc cancause the disc not to function in the player.

Change playlists by using the previous and nextfolder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no filefolders can also be played. If a CD-R containsmore than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,and 255 files, the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are not accessible.

206

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R is treated as afolder. If the root directory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. Allfiles contained directly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains onlyfolders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD-R contains only compressed files,the files are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions are not displayedon a CD-R that was recorded without foldersor playlists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

When the CD-R contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) firstand then goes to the root folder. When theradio displays the name of the folder, the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R are played in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessthe folder mode was chosen as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

207

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name isnot present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension (such as .mp3)as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedoes not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software, can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CDPlayer), or press the load button and wait for themessage to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-Rshould begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R inthe player, it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-sizeCD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in thesame manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 215 for more information.


208



If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currentlyplaying, press and release this button. A beep willsound and Ejecting Disc displays. Once thedisc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-Rcan be removed. If the CD-R is not removed,after several seconds, the CD-R automatically pullsback into the player and begins playing. For theSix-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject buttonfor two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files onthe CD-R currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3 file, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next MP3 file. If eitherSEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, theplayer continues moving backward or forwardthrough MP3 files on the CD.

209

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file.You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within an MP3file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3files on the CD-R can be played in random, ratherthan sequential order, on one CD-R or all discsin a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

1. To play MP3 files in random order from theCD-R that is currently playing, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Random Current Disc displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

210

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in orderby artist or album. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the music navigator label. The player scansthe disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3tag information. It can take several minutes to scanthe disc depending on the number of MP3 filesrecorded to the CD-R. The radio can begin playingwhile it is scanning the disc in the background.When the scan is finished, the CD-R beginsplaying again.

Once the disc has been scanned, the playerdefaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist. Thecurrent artist playing is shown on the second line ofthe display between the arrows. Once all songs bythat artist are played, the player moves to the nextartist in alphabetical order on the CD-R and beginsplaying MP3 files by that artist. If you want to listento MP3 files by another artist, press the pushbuttonlocated below either arrow button. The CD goes tothe next or previous artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either button until the desiredartist displays.

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, push one of the

buttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. The album namedisplays on the second line between the arrows andsongs from the current album and begins to play.Once all songs from that album are played, theplayer moves to the next album in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R and begins playing MP3 filesfrom that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbuttonbelow the Back label to return to normal MP3playback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD while listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays while a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.

211

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune toanother channel.

Channel Unavail Channel nolonger available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

212

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No CAT Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

CAT Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Theftlocked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this messageappears after having your vehicle serviced, check withyour retailer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your retailer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retailer.

XM Not Available XM Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retailer.

213

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static can occurduring normal radio reception if items such ascellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devices areplugged into the accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AMradio stations boost the power levels during theday, and then reduces these levels duringthe night. Static can also occur when things likestorms and power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, try reducing thetreble on the radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsreach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may causethe loss of XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio might display NO XM SIGNAL toindicate interference.

Cellular Phone UsageCellular phone usage could cause interferencewith your vehicle’s radio. This interferencecould occur when making or receiving phone calls,charging the phone’s battery, or simply havingthe phone on. This interference is an increasedlevel of static while listening to the radio. If static isreceived while listening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

214

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened to the antenna base. If tightening isrequired, tighten by hand.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

A vehicle with a sunroof might not get thebest performance from the XM™ system if thesunroof is open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

215

✍ NOTES

216

Your Driving, the Road, and YourVehicle ..................................................... 218Defensive Driving ...................................... 218Drunken Driving ........................................ 219Control of a Vehicle .................................. 222Braking ...................................................... 222Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 223Braking in Emergencies ............................. 225Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .............. 226Limited-Slip Differential .............................. 227Steering .................................................... 227Off-Road Recovery .................................... 230Passing ..................................................... 231Loss of Control .......................................... 233Racing or Other Competitive Driving .......... 234Driving at Night ......................................... 234

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 236City Driving ............................................... 239Freeway Driving ........................................ 240Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 241Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 242Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 242Winter Driving ........................................... 244If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 249Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 250Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 250

Towing ........................................................ 256Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 256Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 256Towing a Trailer ........................................ 259

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

217

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 18.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-endcollisions are about the most preventableof accidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything thatdistracts from the driving task makesproper defensive driving more difficultand can even cause a collision, withresulting injury. Ask a passenger to helpdo these things, or pull off the road in asafe place to do them. These simpledefensive driving techniques could saveyour life.

218

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the number onecontributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half theadult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends upon fourthings:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

219

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if the same person drank three doublemartinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a somewhatlower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercial driversin the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

220

But the ability to drive is affected well below aBAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows thatthe driving skills of many people are impaired at aBAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that theeffects are worse at night. All drivers are impairedat BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statisticsshow that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance ofhaving a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,the chance of this driver having a collision is12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, thechance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or numberof cold showers will speed that up. “I will be careful”is not the right answer. What if there is anemergency, a need to take sudden action, as whena child darts into the street? A person with even amoderate BAC might not be able to react quicklyenough to avoid the collision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home ina cab; or if you are with a group, designatea driver who will not drink.

221

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. SeeEnhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 226.

Adding non-Saturn accessories can affectyour vehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 270.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 170.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the conditionof the brakes; the weight of the vehicle; and theamount of brake force applied.

222

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time tocool between hard stops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If youkeep pace with the traffic and allow realisticfollowing distances, you will eliminate a lot ofunnecessary braking. That means better brakingand longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.

Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 270.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has ABS,this warning light on theinstrument panel willcome on brieflywhen you start yourvehicle.

When you start your engine, or when you begin todrive away, your ABS will check itself. You mayhear a momentary motor or clicking noisewhile this test is going on, and you may evennotice that your brake pedal moves or pulses alittle. This is normal.

223

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmed tomake the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

224

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply your brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard andhold it down — may be the wrong thing to do.Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, thevehicle cannot respond to your steering.

Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it washeaded when the wheels stopped rolling. Thatcould be off the road, into the very thing you weretrying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want tosqueeze the brakes hard without locking thewheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding, easeoff the brake pedal. This will help you retainsteering control. If you do have ABS, it is different.See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 223.

In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

225

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)Your vehicle may have an Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This isespecially useful in slippery road conditions. Thesystem operates only if it senses that one orboth of the front wheels are spinning or beginningto lose traction. When this happens, the systemreduces engine power and may also upshiftthe transaxle to limit wheel spin.

The LOW TRAC message will be displayed whenyour ETS is engaged and limiting wheel spin.See Low Traction Message on page 182. You mayfeel or hear the system working, but this is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the ETSbegins to limit wheel spin, the cruise controlwill automatically disengage. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, you mayre-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Controlon page 147.

The ETS operates in all transaxle shift leverpositions. But the system can upshift the transaxleonly as high as the shift lever position you havechosen, so you should use the lower gearsonly when necessary.

The ETS automatically comes on whenever youstart your vehicle. The light on the traction controlbutton will also come on to let you know thesystem is on. To limit wheel spin, especially inslippery road conditions, you should always leavethe system on. But you can turn the tractioncontrol system off if you ever need to. You shouldturn the system off if your vehicle ever getsstuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking thevehicle is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 250 and If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 249.

To turn the system onor off, press theenhanced tractionsystem button locatedon the instrument panel.

226

When you turn the system off, the TRAC OFFmessage will be displayed. If the ETS is limitingwheel spin when you press the button to turnthe system off, the TRAC OFF message will bedisplayed, but the system will not turn off untilthere is no longer a current need to limit wheelspin. You can turn the system back on at any timeby pressing the button again. The TRAC OFFmessage will no longer be displayed.

Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 270 for more information.

Limited-Slip DifferentialYour vehicle may have this feature. A limited-sliptransaxle can give you additional traction onsnow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like astandard transaxle most of the time, but when oneof the front wheels loses traction, this featurewill allow the wheel with traction to movethe vehicle.

SteeringElectric Power SteeringIf the engine stalls while you are driving, thepower steering assist system will continueto operate until you are able to stop the vehicle.If you lose power steering assist because thesystem is not functioning, you can steer but it willtake much more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel in either directionseveral times until it stops, or hold the steeringwheel in the stopped position for an extendedamount of time, you may notice a reduced amountof power steering assist. The normal amount ofpower steering assist should return shortly after afew normal steering movements.

The electric power steering system does not requireregular maintenance.

If the PWR STRmessage in themessage center isdisplayed, see yourretailer for service.See Power SteeringMessage on page 184.

227

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourvehicle’s speed. While you are in a curve, speedis the one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too much ofthose places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm thoseplaces where the tires meet the road and makeyou lose control. See Enhanced Traction System(ETS) on page 226.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

228

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.

Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 270.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, ora car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time.But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply the brakes — but, unlessyour vehicle has anti-lock brakes, not enoughto lock the wheels. See Braking on page 222. It isbetter to remove as much speed as you canfrom a possible collision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or right depending on thespace available.

229

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations arealways possible is a good reason to practicedefensive driving at all times and wear safety beltsproperly.

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your vehicle’s right wheels havedropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile you are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steeringwheel to go straight down the roadway.

230

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

231

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

232

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If you have the Enhanced Traction System (ETS),remember: It helps to avoid only the accelerationskid. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 226. If you do not have the Enhanced TractionSystem, or if the system is off, then an accelerationskid is also best handled by easing your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you start steering quicklyenough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always beready for a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. Forsafety, you will want to slow down and adjust yourdriving to these conditions. It is important to slowdown on slippery surfaces because stoppingdistance will be longer and vehicle control morelimited.

233

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid.If you do not have ABS, then in a brakingskid, where the wheels are no longer rolling,release enough pressure on the brakes to get thewheels rolling again. This restores steeringcontrol. Push the brake pedal down steadily whenyou have to stop suddenly. As long as thewheels are rolling, you will have steering control.

Racing or Other Competitive DrivingSee your warranty book before using yourvehicle for racing or other competitive driving.After reviewing your warranty book, please see theGM Performance Parts website or catalog andcontact the race sanctioning bodies, for exampleSports Car Club of America (SCCA) or GrandAmerican, for parts and equipment requiredfor racing or other competitive driving.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

234

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

235

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turnas well because your tire-to-road traction is notas good as on dry roads.

And, if your tires do not have much tread left, youwill get even less traction. It is always wise togo slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall whileyou are driving. The surface may get wetsuddenly when your reflexes are tuned for drivingon dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Evenif your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

236

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply the brake pedallightly until the brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try toslow down before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through the engine’s air intakeand badly damage the engine. Never drivethrough water that is slightly lower than theunderbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoiddeep puddles or standing water, drivethrough them very slowly.

237

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especiallycareful when you pass another vehicle.Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and beprepared to have your view restricted byroad spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 328.

238

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 240.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. Atraffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

239

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed tothe posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it isslower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Thenuse your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

240

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.

Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts at Saturn retailers all across theUnited States and Canada. They will be ready andwilling to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

241

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness,or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

242

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes couldget so hot that they would not work well.You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. The brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have theengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transaxle, and you canclimb the hill better.

243

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Also see Tires on page 328.

244

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

245

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

If you have the Enhanced Traction System (ETS),it will improve your ability to accelerate whendriving on a slippery road. Even if your vehicle hasETS, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to the road conditions. Under certainconditions, you may want to turn the ETS off,such as when driving through deep snowand loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motionat lower speeds. See Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) on page 226.

If you do not have ETS, accelerate gently. Try notto break the fragile traction. If you acceleratetoo fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

246

Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too. If youdo have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)on page 223. ABS improves your vehicle’s stabilitywhen you make a hard stop on a slippery road.Whether you have ABS or not, you will want tobegin stopping sooner than you would on drypavement. Without ABS, if you feel your vehiclebegin to slide, let up on the brakes a little. Push thebrake pedal down steadily to get the most tractionyou can.

Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake sohard that your wheels stop rolling, you will justslide. Brake so your wheels always keep rollingand you can still steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greaterfollowing distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear.

If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brakebefore you are on it. Try not to brake whileyou are actually on the ice, and avoid suddensteering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

247

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blocking theexhaust pipe. And check around againfrom time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.

248

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youwill need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

If your vehicle has the Enhanced Traction System(ETS), the ETS can often help to free a stuckvehicle. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 226. If the stuck condition is too severefor the ETS to free the vehicle, turn the ETS offand use the rocking method.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. And, thetransaxle or other parts of the vehicle canoverheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. Whenyou are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transaxle back and forth, you can destroythe transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 250.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 348.

249

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels. Ifyour vehicle has the enhanced traction system(ETS), you should turn the ETS off. See EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 226. Then shiftback and forth between REVERSE (R) and aforward gear, or with a manual transaxle, betweenFIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R),spinning the wheels as little as possible. Releasethe accelerator pedal while you shift, and presslightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxleis in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directions, you will causea rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If thatdoes not get your vehicle out after a few tries, itmay need to be towed out. If your vehicledoes need to be towed out, see Towing YourVehicle on page 256.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it may properly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and the Certification/Tirelabel. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it may properly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and the VehicleCertification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

250

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post(striker). The Tire and Loading Information labellists the number of occupant seating positions (A),and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also lists thetire size of the original equipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). Formore information on tires and inflation, see Tires onpage 328 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 337.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see“Certification Label” later in this section.

Label Example

251

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity for your vehicle.

If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 259 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

252

Item Description Total

AMaximum VehicleCapacity Weight forExample 1 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

253



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’smaximum vehicle capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is found onthe rear edge of the driver’s door.

The label shows the gross weight capacity of yourvehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and tongueweight if pulling a trailer.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

Example 3

254

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If things like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else are put inside the vehicle, they willgo as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.In a trunk, put them as far forward asyou can. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

255

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your retailer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 415.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following inthis section.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your retailer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you will want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leavingon a Long Trip on page 241.

256

Dinghy Towing (All Transaxles)Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing yourvehicle may cause damage because of reducedground clearance. Always tow your vehicleusing the dolly towing or dinghy towingprocedure listed in this section or put yourvehicle on a flatbed truck.

To tow your vehicle from the front with all fourwheels on the ground, do the following:1. Set the parking brake.2. Turn the ignition key to ACC (Accessory) to

unlock the steering wheel.

3. Shift your transaxle to NEUTRAL.

4. Release the parking brake.

To prevent battery rundown on long trips, removethe IP BATT 2 fuse (#41) from the enginecompartment fuse block. See Engine CompartmentFuse Block on page 378 for more information.

Once you have reached your destination, be sureto replace this fuse back into its original location.

Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) whiletowing your vehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towingyour vehicle.

Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairs would notbe covered by the warranty. Never have yourvehicle towed from the rear.

Notice: Don’t tow a vehicle with the frontdrive wheels on the ground if one of the fronttires is a compact spare tire. Towing withtwo different tire sizes on the front of thevehicle can cause severe damage to thetransaxle.

257

Dolly Towing (All Transaxles)Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing yourvehicle may cause damage because of reducedground clearance. Always tow your vehicleusing the dolly towing or dinghy towingprocedure listed in this section or put yourvehicle on a flatbed truck.

To tow your vehicle from the front with two wheelson the ground, do the following:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. If you have an automatic transaxle, shift thetransaxle to PARK (P). If you have a manualtransaxle, shift the vehicle to SECOND (2).

3. Set the parking brake and then removethe key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designed fortowing.

5. Release the parking brake.

258

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if you havefollowed all the steps in this section. Askyour retailer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costly repairsnot covered by your warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in this part and seeyour retailer for important information abouttowing a trailer with your vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped withthe proper trailer towing equipment. To identifythe trailering capacity of your vehicle, you shouldread the information in “Weight of the Trailer”that appears later in this section. Traileringis different than just driving your vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes in handling, durabilityand fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That is the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transaxle, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tiresare forced to work harder against the drag ofthe added weight. The engine is requiredto operate at relatively higher speeds and undergreater loads, generating extra heat. What is more,the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

259

If You Do Decide to Pull a TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving. Agood source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask ahitch retailer about sway controls.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first1000 miles (1600 km) your new vehicleis driven. Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) thatyou tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Do not drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

• Do not tow a trailer when the outsidetemperature is above 100°F (38°C).

Three important considerations have to do withweight:• the weight of the trailer,• the weight of the trailer tongue• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).But even that can be too heavy.It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used topull a trailer are all important. It can also depend onany special equipment that you have on yourvehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

260

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo must be subtracted from the maximumtrailer weight.

You can ask your retailer for trailering informationor advice.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. And ifyou tow a trailer, you must add the tongue loadto the GVW because your vehicle will be carryingthat weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 250 for more information about your vehicle’smaximum load capacity.

If you are using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailertongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B). If you are using aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailerweight (B).

After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they are not, you may beable to get them right simply by moving someitems around in the trailer.

261

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upperlimit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on theTire-Loading Information label, See Loading YourVehicle on page 250. Then be sure you don’t goover the GVW limit for your vehicle, including theweight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you’ll need the righthitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is notintended for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other bumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch that does notattach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the bodyof your vehicle when you install a trailerhitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holeslater when you remove the hitch. If you donot seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.See Engine Exhaust on page 120. Dirtand water can, too.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitch manufactureror by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to thebumper. Always leave just enough slack so youcan turn with your rig. And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesIf your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do not try totap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system.If you do, both brake systems won’t work well, orat all.

Be sure to read and follow the instructions for thetrailer brakes, so you will be able to install,adjust and maintain them properly.

262

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch andplatform (and attachments), safety chains,electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirroradjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, startyour vehicle and trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by hand to be sure thebrakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou will need more passing distance up aheadwhen you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’rea good deal longer when towing a trailer, youwill need to go much farther beyond the passedvehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with onehand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

263

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you are turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailer willnot strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.See your retailer if you need information.The arrows on your instrument panel will flashwhenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbson the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may thinkdrivers behind you are seeing your signal whenthey are not. It’s important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving on Grades

Notice: Do not tow on steep continuousgrades exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended,higher than normal engine and transaxletemperatures may result and damage yourvehicle. Frequent stops are very important toallow the engine and transaxle to cool.

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdo not shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot andno longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduceyour speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reducethe possibility of the engine and the transaxleoverheating. If your engine does overheat,see Engine Overheating on page 297.

264

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill. Ifsomething goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) for an automatic transaxle, or intogear for a manual transaxle.When parking uphill, turn your wheels awayfrom the curb. When parking downhill,turn your wheels into the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailerwheels.

3. When the chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake and shift into PARK (P) for anautomatic transaxle or REVERSE (R) fora manual transaxle.

5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• start your engine

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thechocks.

265

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou are pulling a trailer. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 391 for more information.Things that are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’toverfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drive belt,cooling system and brake system. Each of theseis covered in this manual, and the Index willhelp you find them quickly. If you are trailering,it’s a good idea to review this informationbefore you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 297.

Changing a Tire When Trailer TowingIf you get a flat tire while towing a trailer, besure to secure the trailer and disconnect it fromthe vehicle before changing the tire.

266

Service ........................................................ 270Accessories and Modifications ................... 270California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 271Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 271Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 272Fuel ............................................................. 272

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 272Gasoline Specifications .............................. 273California Fuel ........................................... 273Additives ................................................... 273Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 274Filling the Tank ......................................... 275Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 277

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 278Hood Release ........................................... 279Engine Compartment Overview .................. 280Engine Oil ................................................. 283Engine Oil Life System .............................. 288Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 290Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 292Manual Transaxle Fluid ............................. 293Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 293

Engine Coolant .......................................... 293Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 297Engine Overheating ................................... 297Cooling System ......................................... 300Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 307Brakes ...................................................... 308Battery ...................................................... 311Jump Starting ............................................ 312

Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 318Bulb Replacement ....................................... 318

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 318Headlamps (Coupe) ................................... 319Headlamps (Sedan) ................................... 320Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime

Running Lamps (DRL) (Coupe) .............. 322Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime

Running Lamps (DRL) (Sedan) .............. 323Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) ................................ 324Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ...................................... 324License Plate Lamp ................................... 326Replacement Bulbs ................................... 326

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

267

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 327Tires ............................................................ 328

Winter Tires (Red Line) ............................. 329Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 330Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 334Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 337High-Speed Operation ............................... 338Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 339When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 341Buying New Tires ...................................... 341Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 343Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 344Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 346Wheel Replacement .................................. 346Tire Chains ............................................... 348If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 349Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 350Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 351Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 356Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 362Compact Spare Tire .................................. 365

Appearance Care ........................................ 366Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 366Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 367Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 368Care of Safety Belts .................................. 369Weatherstrips ............................................ 369Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 369Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 370Finish Care ............................................... 370Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 370Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 371Tires ......................................................... 372Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 372Finish Damage .......................................... 372Underbody Maintenance ............................ 372Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 373Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 373

Vehicle Identification .................................. 374Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 374Service Parts Identification Label ............... 374


268

Electrical System ........................................ 375Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 375Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 375Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 375

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 375Floor Console Fuse Block ......................... 376Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 378

Capacities and Specifications .................... 384


269

ServiceYour Saturn retailer knows your vehicle best andwants you to be happy with it. We hope youwill go to your retailer for all your service needs.You will get genuine Saturn parts andSaturn-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your Saturn vehicleall Saturn.

Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-Saturn accessories to yourvehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performanceand safety, including such things as, airbags,braking, stability, ride and handling, emissionssystems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronicsystems like anti-lock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of these accessoriesmay even cause malfunction or damage notcovered by warranty.

Saturn accessories are designed to complementand function with other systems on yourvehicle. Your Saturn retailer can accessorize yourvehicle using genuine Saturn accessories.When you go to your Saturn retailer and ask forSaturn accessories, you will know thatSaturn-trained and supported service technicianswill perform the work using genuine Saturnaccessories.

270

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you should use the proper service manual. Ittells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order the properservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 425.

271

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 82.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 406.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your retailer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, Saturn recommendsthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

The 8th digit of the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) shows the code letter or numberthat identifies your vehicle’s engine. The VIN is atthe top left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 374.

Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 2.2L L4 engine (VIN Code F),use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octanerating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, you may notice an audible knocking noisewhen you drive, commonly referred to as sparkknock. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If you areusing gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and youhear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.

272

If your vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code B)or the 2.0L Supercharged engine (VIN Code P), usepremium unleaded gasoline with a posted octanerating of 91 or higher. You may also use regularunleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, butyour vehicle’s acceleration may be slightly reduced,and you may notice a slight audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as spark knock. If the octaneis less than 87, you may notice a heavy knockingnoise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If youare using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher andyou hear heavy knocking, your engine needsservice.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). Saturn recommends against the useof gasolines containing MMT. See Additives onpage 273 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. See theunderhood emission control label. If this fuel is notavailable in states adopting California emissionsstandards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily onfuels meeting federal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on and yourvehicle may fail a smog-check test. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 174. If this occurs, return toyour authorized Saturn retailer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by the typeof fuel used, repairs may not be covered by yourwarranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.

273

However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your retailer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such asethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolinesmay be available in your area. We recommend thatyou use these gasolines if they comply with thespecifications described earlier. However,E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containingmore than 10% ethanol must not be usedin vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldnot be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.We recommend against the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life ofspark plugs and the performance of the emissioncontrol system may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return toyour retailer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any otherfuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

274

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not usecellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against thelaw in some places. Do not re-entervehicle while pumping fuel. Keep childrenaway from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; ifthe cap is released too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tetherbelow the fuel fill opening.

275

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 369.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.

This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 174.

In addition, the CHECK GAS CAP message willbe displayed in the Message Center if the fuel capis not properly reinstalled. See Check Gas CapMessage on page 185 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sureto get the right type. Your retailer can getone for you. If you get the wrong type, it maynot fit properly. This may cause yourmalfunction indicator lamp to light and maydamage your fuel tank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 174.

276

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignitethe gasoline vapor. You can be badlyburned and your vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to you andothers:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is insidea vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.



• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumpinggasoline.

• Do not use a cellular phone whilepumping gasoline.

277

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

278

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the interior hoodrelease handle withthis symbol on it. It islocated to the left ofthe steering columnbelow the instrumentpanel.

2. Push the secondary hood release lever,located under the center of the hoodabove the grille, to the right to disengage it.

3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from itsretainer, and put the hood prop into the slot inthe hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop. Remove the hoodprop from the slot in the hood and return the propto its retainer. Then just let the hood down andclose it firmly.

279

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 2.2L L4 engine (2.4L L4 engine similar), here is what you will see:

280

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 290.

B. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 283.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 283.

D. Electric Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View).See Cooling System on page 300.

E. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 308 and HydraulicClutch on page 293.

F. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 378.

G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 312.

H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See EngineCoolant on page 293.

I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 307.

281

When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 Supercharged engine, here is what you will see:

282

A. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 283.

B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan. See CoolingSystem on page 300.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 283.

D. Intercooler System Pressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 293.

E. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 308 and HydraulicClutch on page 293.

F. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 290.

G. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 378.

H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 312.

I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See CoolantSurge Tank Pressure Cap on page 297.

J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 307.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 280for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick, clean it with a papertowel or cloth and then push it back in allthe way.

3. Pull out the dipstick again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

283

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, youneed to add at least one quart/liter of oil. But youmust use the right kind. This section explainswhat kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities and Specificationson page 384.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe upper mark that shows the properoperating range, the engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 280for the location of the engine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range.Push the dipstick all the way back in when youare through.

2.2L L4 Engine and2.4L L4 Engine

2.0L L4 SuperchargedEngine

284

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseFor Vehicles With the 2.2L or2.4L L4 Engine

Look for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. Look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

285

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provideeasier cold starting and better protection forthe engine at extremely low temperatures.

For Vehicles with the 2.0L L4Supercharged Engine Only

Look for two things:• GM4718M

Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oilmeeting GM Standard GM4718M, suchas Mobil 1® or equivalent. Oils meeting thisstandard may be identified as synthetic.However, not all synthetic oils will meet thisGM standard. Look for and use only an oil thatmeets GM Standard GM4718M.

286

Notice: If you use oils that do not have theGM4718M Standard designation, you can causeengine damage not covered by your warranty.• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this on the oil container, and use onlythose oils that are identified as meeting GMStandard GM4718M and have the starburst symbolon the front of the oil container.

Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with asynthetic oil which meets all requirements foryour vehicle.

Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintainengine oil level, oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M may not be available. You can addsubstitute oil designated SAE 5W-30 withthe starburst symbol at all temperatures. Substituteoil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M shouldnot be used for an oil change.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMstandards are all you need for good performanceand engine protection.

287

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHG OIL message in themessage center will come on. See Change EngineOil Message on page 183 for more informationon this message. Change the oil as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It ispossible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the oil life system may not indicate thatan oil change is necessary for over a year.

However, the engine oil and filter must be changedat least once a year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your retailer has trained servicepeople who will perform this work using genuineSaturn parts and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularly and keep it atthe proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sinceyour last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange the engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime the oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange the oil prior to the CHG OIL messagebeing turned on, reset the system.

288

After changing the engine oil, reset the system bydoing the following:

1. Press and release the trip/reset button untilthe OIL LIFE message is displayed.

2. Then press and hold the trip/reset button untila chime sounds five times, and RESET isdisplayed in the message center.When the system is reset, the odometer willagain be displayed in the message center.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

If the CHG OIL message comes back on whenyou start your vehicle, the engine oil life systemhas not reset. Repeat the procedure.

Your vehicle has a unique oil filter element. Wheninstalling the filler cap do not exceed 18 lb-ft(25 Y). Inspect the condition of the O-ring andreplace if damaged. See your Saturn retailerfor additional information.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oilby putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of used oil, ask your retailer,a service station or a local recycling centerfor help.

289

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Replacement

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 280for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

2.2L L4 Engine shown, 2.4L L4 Engine similar

2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine

290

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 391 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,do the following:

1. Loosen the hose clamp that is on the inletduct on the cover and pull off the hose.

2. For vehicles that have the 2.2L L4 or 2.4L L4engine, release the two clips and turn the coverupward to unhook the hinges. For vehicles thathave the 2.0L L4 Supercharged engine,remove the three screws on the cover.

3. Pull the air cleaner/filter box cover out andremove the air filter element from the air filterbox. If the element is dirty, you should replaceit. If the element is only dusty, it may becleaned by blowing compressed air through itfrom the clean side. Make sure you are awayfrom your engine compartment when cleaningthe air filter with compressed air.

291

4. Wipe all dust from inside the housing andinspect the air cleaner and air inlet tube forcracks, cuts and deterioration. The airinlet tube must be replaced if it is damaged.

5. Install the air filter element, hose, hose clampand cover.

6. For vehicles that have the 2.2L L4 or 2.4L L4engine, latch the two clips. For vehicles thathave the 2.0L L4 Supercharged engine,reinstall the three screws.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

Automatic Transaxle FluidIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle toyour retailer’s service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 394, andbe sure to use the transaxle fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 402.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 402.

292

Manual Transaxle FluidIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluidloss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to yourretailer’s service department and have it repairedas soon as possible. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 402 for the proper fluidto use.

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle isself-adjusting. This system does not have its ownreservoir. It receives fluid from the brake mastercylinder reservoir.

See Brakes on page 308 for more information.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 297.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work asthey should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, at thefirst maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

293

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your retailer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 402 for more information.

294

Checking Coolant

The surge tank is located on the driver’s side ofthe engine compartment. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 280 for moreinformation on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be parked on a level surface.When your engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe near the cold fill line. When your engine iswarm, the level should be at the cold fill line or alittle higher.

295

Checking Intercooler System Coolant(2.0L L4 Engine Only)

Park your vehicle on a level surface and turn offthe engine. When your engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be just visible within the horizontaltube section of the fill neck. When your engine iswarm, the coolant level could be as high asthe FULL HOT line, or a little higher. The FULLHOT line has an arrow pointing down at it.Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tankand/or intercooler fill neck, but only when theengine is cool. See Cooling System on page 300for instructions on how to add coolant to thecoolant surge tank and/or intercooler fill neck.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing a pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

296

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

If you replace your coolant surge tank pressurecap, a Saturn cap is required.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 173 for moreinformation.

You also have a check gage message and atransaxle fluid hot message. See Check GageMessage on page 184 and Transaxle FluidHot Message on page 183.

Notice: Driving with the CHK GAGE messagedisplayed in the message center and theEngine Coolant Temperature Gage on yourinstrument panel in the red zone could causeyour vehicle to overheat. Your vehicle couldbe damaged and the damages might notbe covered by your warranty.

297

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Justturn it off and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.



If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

298

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning with nowarning messages, but see or hear no steam, theproblem may not be too serious. Sometimesthe engine can get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, turnit off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

3. Try to minimize engine load. If you are in atraffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise,shift to the highest gear possible while driving.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle theengine for three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

299

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling FanB. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level should be at the cold fill line.If it is not, you may have a leak at the radiatorhoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump,or somewhere else in the cooling system.2.2L L4 Engine shown, 2.4L L4 and

2.0L L4 Supercharged Engines similar

300

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fanis running. If the engine is overheating, thefan should be running. If it is not, your vehicleneeds service. Turn off the engine.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant inyour vehicle.

301

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is not at the cold fillline, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it. See Engine Coolant onpage 293 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolant



surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

{CAUTION:


302

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the cooling system,including the upper radiator hose, is no longerhot. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one-quarter of a turn.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.This will allow any pressure still left to bevented out the discharge hose.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

303

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to the coldfill line.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the levelis lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the cold fill line.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

Check the level in the surge tank when the coolingsystem has cooled down. If the coolant is not atthe proper level, repeat Steps 1 through 3and reinstall the pressure cap. If the coolant is notat the proper level when the system cools downagain, see your retailer.

304

How to Add Coolant to theIntercooler System Fill Neck(2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine Only)If you have not found a problem yet, turn theengine off and allow it to cool down, then check tosee if coolant is visible within the horizontaltube section of the fill neck. If coolant is not visible,add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL® coolant to the fill neck. Be surethe Intercooler System, including the IntercoolerSystem pressure cap, is cool before doing so. SeeEngine Coolant on page 293 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Turning the Intercooler System pressurecap when the engine and intercooler arehot can allow steam and scalding liquidsto blow out and burn you badly. Neverturn the Intercooler System pressure cap,even a little, when the engine andintercooler are hot.

{CAUTION:


Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

305

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove the Intercooler Systempressure cap when the Intercooler System,including the upper intercooler hoses, are no

longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one-quarter of a turn. Ifyou hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This willallow any pressure still left to be vented.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

3. Add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixtureto the fill neck, until there is coolant visible inthe horizontal tube section of the fill neck.

4. With the Intercooler System pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run for a couple ofminutes. Watch out for the engine cooling fan.Turn the engine off.By this time, the coolant level inside the fillneck may be lower. If the level drops to wherecoolant is no longer visible in the horizontaltube section of the fill neck, with the engine offadd more of the DEX-COOL® coolantmixture to the fill neck until the level is againvisible in the horizontal tube section.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

If the coolant is not at the proper level when thesystem cools down again, see your retailer.

306

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Windshield Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 280for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

307

Brakes

Brake FluidThe hydraulic clutch andbrake master cylinderuse the same reservoir.The reservoir is filledwith DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 280 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system or hydraulic clutch system ifyou have a manual transaxle. If it is, you shouldhave both systems checked and the necessaryrepairs made, since a leak means that sooner orlater your brakes and/or clutch will not workwell, or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on thebrake and/or clutch hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake and/or clutchhydraulic system.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, yourbrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 170.

308

Checking Brake FluidYou can check the brake fluid level withoutremoving the reservoir cap by just looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. The fluid level should be at orbelow the MAX fill mark. After work has beendone on the brake hydraulic system, make surethe level does not exceed the MAX fill mark onthe reservoir.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 402.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 369.

309

Brake WearYour vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drumbrakes or rear disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first appliedor lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to Saturnspecifications.

The rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators,but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise,have the rear brake linings inspected immediately.Also, the rear brake drums should be removedand inspected each time the tires are removed forrotation or changing. When you have the frontbrake pads replaced, have the rear brakesinspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

310

Brake Pedal TravelSee your retailer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increasein pedal travel. This could be a sign of braketrouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a moderate brake stop, yourbrakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make amoderate or heavier stop, then your brakes mightnot adjust correctly. If you drive in that way,then — very carefully — make a few moderatebrake stops about every 1,000 miles (1 600 km),so your brakes will adjust properly.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex.Its many parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have reallygood braking. Your vehicle was designed andtested with top-quality brake parts. Whenyou replace parts of your braking system — forexample, when your brake linings wear down andyou need new ones put in — be sure you getnew approved Saturn replacement parts. If you donot, your brakes may no longer work properly.

For example, if someone puts in brake linings thatare wrong for your vehicle, the balance betweenyour front and rear brakes can change — forthe worse. The braking performance you havecome to expect can change in many other ways ifsomeone puts in the wrong replacement brakeparts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery.

Your vehicle’s battery is located in the trunk nextto the compact spare tire. To access thebattery, use the trunk’s floor carpet latch to lift thecover up.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

311

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 312 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

312

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that arenot needed. This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it could savethe radio!

313

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)and negative (−) terminal locations on eachvehicle.You will not need to access your battery forjump starting. Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) and a remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal.The remote positive (+) terminal is located onthe engine compartment fuse block, under ared cap. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 280 for more information on location.The remote negative (−) ground terminal is abolt located under the metal frame thatsupports the radiator. It is at the front of theengine compartment, on the driver’s sideof the vehicle, and is marked with a label thatsays GND (−).

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

314

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Remove the terminal cover and connect thered positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal of the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

315

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of thenegative (−) cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away fromthe dead battery, but not near engineparts that move. The electrical connection isjust as good there, and the chance ofsparks getting back to the battery is muchless.Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)terminal for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Press the unlock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehiclehas one, to disarm your security system.

12. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order, makingsure that the cables do not touch each otheror other metal.

316

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine PartB. Good BatteryC. Dead Battery

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the red protector cap to its originalposition.

Jumper Cable Removal

317

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset at the factory andshould need no further adjustment.

If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, theheadlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment tothe low-beam headlamps may be necessary if itis difficult to see the lane markers (for horizontalaim), or if oncoming drivers flash their high-beamheadlamps at you (for vertical aim). If youbelieve your headlamps need to be re-aimed, werecommend that you take your vehicle to yourretailer for service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the type of bulb to use, see ReplacementBulbs on page 326.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

318

Headlamps (Coupe)To change a headlamp bulb on a coupe model, dothe following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 279 for more information.

2. Pull up on the headlamp retaining pins (A) toremove them from the headlamp assembly.

3. Pull the headlamp assembly (B) away from thevehicle and remove the electrical connector.

4. Raise the lock tab and pull the connector fromthe base of the bulb to remove the electricalconnector from the headlamp bulb.

5. Remove the retaining nut (D) by turning itcounterclockwise.

6. Remove the bulb (C) and replace it with theappropriate bulb.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlampassembly.

319

Headlamps (Sedan)To change a headlamp bulb on a sedan model, dothe following:


2. Pull up on the headlamp retaining pins (A) toremove them from the headlamp assembly.

3. Pull the headlamp assembly (B) away from thevehicle and remove the electrical connector.

4. Access the bulb by turning the dust capcounterclockwise to remove it.

320

5. Raise the lock tab and pull the connector (C)from the base of the bulb to remove theelectrical connector.

6. Remove the bulb retaining nut (E) by turning itcounterclockwise.

7. Remove the bulb (D) and replace it with theappropriate bulb.

8. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lampassembly.

321

Front Turn Signal, Parking andDaytime Running Lamps (DRL)(Coupe)To change this bulb on a coupe model, do thefollowing:


2. Reach behind the headlamp from insidethe hood.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove it from the housing.

4. Pull the bulb (A) from the socket (B) andreplace it with the appropriate bulb.

5. Reinstall the bulb socket (B) by turning itclockwise.

322

Front Turn Signal, Parking andDaytime Running Lamps (DRL)(Sedan)To change this bulb on a sedan model, do thefollowing:

1. Follow Steps 1 through 4 to remove theheadlamp assembly. See the headlampremoval for sedan under Headlamps (Coupe)on page 319 or Headlamps (Sedan) onpage 320. This bulb is located next to thehigh/low-beam headlamp.

2. Remove the bulb socket (B) by turning itcounterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb (A) and replace it with theappropriate bulb.

4. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lampassembly.

323

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)To change a CHMSL bulb, do the following:

1. Remove the CHMSL cover by pulling down onthe cover edges from inside the vehicle.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove it.

3. Replace with the appropriate bulb.

4. Reinstall the bulb socket by turning itclockwise.

5. Replace the cover.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up LampsTo change one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 98for more information.

2. Remove the three retaining screws from thetaillamp assembly.

324

3. Slide the taillamp assembly back and removeit from the quarter panel.

4. Remove the bulb socket (B) by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Pull the bulb (A) from the socket and replaceit with the appropriate bulb.

6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the taillampassembly.

325

License Plate LampTo replace the license plate lamp bulb, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the two screws holding the licenseplate lamp assembly to the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thelamp assembly.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb NumberBack-up Lamps 921CHMSL PC-175Front Turn Signal/ParkingLamp/DRL 5702KA 1

Headlamps 9007Stoplamp andTaillamps (Top) 3057K

1 Phillips Only

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer/retailer.

326

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 391 for more information.Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For proper type andlength, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 404.

To replace the windshield wiper blade assemblydo the following:1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage thehook and push the wiper arm (A) out of theblade (C).

3. Push the new wiper blade securely on thewiper arm until you hear the release leverclick into place.

327

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your Saturn Warrantybooklet for details. For additional information referto the tire manufacturer’s booklet included withyour vehicle.

{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 250.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour tires are cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 337.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.

See High-Speed Operation on page 338 forinflation pressure adjustment for highspeed driving.

328

Low-Profile Performance Tire(Red Line)If your vehicle has 215/45ZR17 size tires, they areclassified as low-profile performance tires. Thesetires are designed for very responsive driving onwet or dry pavement. You may also notice moreroad noise with low-profile performance tires andthat they tend to wear faster.

Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,they are more susceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damagecan occur when coming into contact with roadhazards like, potholes, or sharp edgedobjects, or when sliding into a curb. Your GMwarranty does not cover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressureand, when possible avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other road hazards.

Winter Tires (Red Line)If your vehicle has 215/45ZR17 size tires, they areclassified as low-profile performance tires.These tires are designed for very responsivedriving on wet or dry pavement. If you expect todrive on snow or ice covered roads often, you maywant to get winter tires for your vehicle. Thelow-profile performance tires may not offer thetraction you would like or the same level ofperformance as winter tires on snow or icecovered roads.

Winter tires, in general, are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice covered roads. Withwinter tires, there may be decreased dryroad traction, increased road noise and shorter tiretread life. After switching to winter tires, be alertfor changes in vehicle handling and braking.

See your retailer for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection. Also, seeBuying New Tires on page 341.

329

If you choose to use winter tires:

• Use tires of the same brand and tread type onall four wheel positions.

• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, loadrange, and speed rating as your originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as youroriginal equipment tires may not be available for H,V, W and ZR speed rated tires. If you choosewinter tires with a lower speed rating, neverexceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall. (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of

letters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

330

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 344.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

331

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.If your vehicle has a compact spare tire,see Compact Spare Tire on page 365 and If aTire Goes Flat on page 349.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 337.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

Compact Spare Tire Example

332

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standards setby the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent ashigh as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

333

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 337.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 250.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 250.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 250.

334

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 250.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 337 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 250.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laidat 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

335

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 341.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 344.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 250.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 250.

336

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to support yourvehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 250. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 365.

337

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed driving causesexcessive heat build up and can causesudden tire failure. You could have a crashand you or others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires require inflationpressure adjustment for high speedoperation. When speed limits and roadconditions are such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make sure the tiresare rated for high speed operation, inexcellent condition, and set to the correctcold tire inflation pressure for thevehicle load.

338

The low-profile performance tires, size215/45ZR17, require tire inflation pressureadjustment when driving your vehicle at speeds of100 mph (160 km/h) or higher. Set the cold tireinflation pressure to 33 psi (227 kPa) for the frontand rear tires when operating your vehicle athigh-speed conditions.

When you end high-speed driving, return the tiresto the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tireand Loading Information Label. See Loading YourVehicle on page 250 and Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 337.

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 341and Wheel Replacement on page 346 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 391.

When rotating non-directional tires, always use thecorrect rotation pattern shown here.

Non-Directional Tires

339

If your vehicle has 215/45ZR17 size tires, they aredirectional tires and must roll in a certain directionfor the best overall performance. The direction isshown by an arrow on the tire sidewall. Becausethese tires are directional, they should be rotated asshown here. These tires should only be moved fromfront to rear and rear to front on the same side ofthe vehicle.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 250 for an example ofthe tire and loading information label andits location on your vehicle. Make certain that allwheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel NutTorque” under Capacities and Specifications onpage 384.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel boltsbecome loose after a time. The wheelcould come off and cause an accident.When you change a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,you can use a cloth or a paper towel to dothis; but be sure to use a scraper or wirebrush later, if you need to, to get all therust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 350.

Directional Tires

340

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

341

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by anMS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 330 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,



brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle.See Compact Spare Tire on page 365.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

342

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed onthe Tire and Loading Information label. Thislabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 250,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and stability control, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use Saturn specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aSaturn certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 341 andAccessories and Modifications on page 270 foradditional information.

343

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

344

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

345

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your retailer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replaceit (except some aluminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See your dealer/retailer ifany of these conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheelyou need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew Saturn original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

346

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 350 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newSaturn original equipment wheel.

347

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P195/60R15,P205/55R16 or 215/45ZR17 size tires, donot use tire chains, there is not enoughclearance.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension orother vehicle parts. The area damaged bythe tire chains could cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle and you or othersmay be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only ifits manufacturer recommends it for useon your vehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions. To help avoiddamage to your vehicle, drive slowly,



re-adjust or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and do not spinyour wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the front tires.

Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other thanP195/60R15, P205/55R16 or 215/45ZR17 sizetires, use tire chains only where legal and onlywhen you must. Use only SAE Class “S” typechains that are the proper size for your tires.Install them on the front tires and tighten themas tightly as possible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and follow the chainmanufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear thechains contacting your vehicle, stop andretighten them. If the contact continues,slow down until it stops. Driving too fast orspinning the wheels with chains on willdamage your vehicle.

348

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Get the vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be verybumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

349

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour hazard warning flashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatic transaxle shift leverin PARK (P), or shift a manualtransaxle to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).



3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When you have a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

350

The following information will tell you how to usethe jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need is located inthe trunk.

Models with a 2.2L L4 or 2.4L Engine1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 98

for more information.

2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tireand tools.

351

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Spare TireD. Wing NutE. Jack and Wheel WrenchF. Bolt

352

3. Remove the retainer (B) that holds down thespare tire. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 365

4. Remove the spare tire (C) by gently pulling itup and out of the trunk.

5. Remove the wing nut (D) that holds the jackand remove the jack and wheel wrench (E).

Models with a 2.0L L4 SuperchargedEngine1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 98 for

more information.

2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tireand tools.

353

A. RetainerB. Jack and Wheel WrenchC. Spare TireD. Foam SupportE. Bolt

3. Remove the retainer (A) that holds down thejack, wheel wrench (B) and spare tire (C).

4. Remove the spare tire by placing your handsat the four and eight o’clock positions. Gentlypull it up and out of the trunk.

The tools you will be using include the jack (A)and wheel wrench (B).

354

You will need to turn the plastic wheel nutcounterclockwise to loosen the wheel wrench fromthe jack.

Press the button and then pull on the end of thewheel wrench to extend the handle.

355

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire1. If your vehicle has plastic wheel covers, use

the wheel wrench to loosen the plastic wheelnut caps.Once you have loosened the plastic wheel nutcaps with the wheel wrench, you can finishloosening them with your fingers. The plasticnut caps do not come off. Using the flatend of the wheel wrench, pry along the edgeof the wheel cover until it comes off.If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, firstremove the center cap by pulling it out with thewheel wrench.

2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheelnuts. Do not remove them yet.

Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is inthe correct position or you may damageyour vehicle. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

356

3. Position the jack lift head at the jack locationnearest the flat tire. The front location is about7 inches (17.8 cm) rearward from the frontwheel opening. The rear location is about2 inches (5.1 cm) forward of the rear wheelopening.Make sure the jack head is touching the metaljacking flange under the body. Do not placethe jack under the plastic body panel.

4. Put the compact spare tire near you.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

357

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handleclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enough room forthe compact spare tire to fit under the vehicle.

358

6. Remove all of thewheel nuts.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time.The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle.



In an emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

7. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces and sparewheel.

8. Place the compact spare tire on thewheel-mounting surface.

359

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

9. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded endof the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nutby hand until the wheel is held against the hub.

10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

360

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 384for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 384 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

11. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscrosssequence, as shown.

361

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.

Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compactspare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel coverin the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired orreplaced.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

362

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Jack and Wheel WrenchD. Stow Bolt ExtensionE. Spare TireF. Bolt

2.2L L4 and 2.4L Engine

363

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Jack and Wheel WrenchD. Stow Bolt ExtensionE. Spare TireF. Foam SupportG. Bolt

To store a flat or spare tire and tools, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the stow bolt extension rod andsleeve from the jack.

2. Re-attach the wheel wrench to the jack.

3. Place the flat tire face down into the spare tirehub. Avoid scraping the aluminum wheel, ifequipped, on the hold-down bolt.

4. Screw the stow bolt extension rod andthe sleeve into the existing spare tirehold-down bolt.

5. Place the jack into the center of the flat tire,being careful not to scratch the inside ofthe wheel.


364

6. Place the smaller jack hold-down nut in a safeplace for use when you put the compactspare tire back into the trunk.

7. Remove the plastic sleeve from the stow boltextension rod. Secure the jack and roadwheel using the larger plastic retainer.

The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare with a full-size tireas soon as possible.

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spareis made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles

(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and havethe full-size tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best to replace thespare with a full-size tire as soon as possible.The spare tire will last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

365

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for which

they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label. While cleaningyour vehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your retailer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your retailer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

366

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interiorand does not improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

367

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

368

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 402.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strongsoaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse thevehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.You can get approved cleaning products fromyour retailer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 373. Do not use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum based, or that contain acid orabrasives. All cleaning agents should beflushed promptly and not allowed to dry on thesurface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with asoft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter your vehicle.

369

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 369.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of yourvehicle by hand may be necessary to removeresidue from the paint finish. You can get approvedcleaning products from your Saturn retailer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 373.

Your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe for painted surfacesto remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. You can help tokeep the paint finish looking new by keeping yourvehicle in a garage or covered wheneverpossible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

370

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Clean theblade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent.Then rinse the blade with water.Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum WheelsNotice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trimmay be damaged if you do not wash yourvehicle after driving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodiumchloride. These chlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust. This damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty. Always wash your vehicle’s chromewith soap and water after exposure.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Use onlySaturn-approved cleaners on aluminumor chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

371

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repairshop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your Saturnretailer. Larger areas of finish damage canbe corrected in your Saturn retailer’s body andpaint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should beloosened before being flushed. Your Saturnretailer or an underbody car washing system cando this for you.

372

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on yourvehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.Although no defect in the paint job causes this,Saturn will repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of new vehicles damaged by this falloutcondition within 12 months or 12,000 miles(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsDescription Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke, and fingerprints.

Description Usage

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish EnhancerRemoves dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one easy step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot LifterQuickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl, andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather, and carpet.

373

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code helps you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on your spare tire cover. It isvery helpful if you ever need to order parts.The label has the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

374

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your retailerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 82.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If the overload is caused bysome electrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows and OtherPower OptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse panel protect thepower windows and other power accessories.When the current load is too heavy, the circuitbreaker opens and closes, protecting the circuituntil the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses.This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused byelectrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

375

Floor Console Fuse Block

Some fuses are in a fuse block on the driver’sside of the floor console. To remove the floorconsole cover, move the driver’s seat back as faras it will go, and pull the floor console cover,starting near the front of the vehicle, away fromthe floor console.

Then remove the fuse block cover to accessthe fuses.

Fuses UsageFUEL PUMP Fuel Pump Relay

BCM ELECT Ignition Switch, Body ControlModule (BCM)

BCM (PWR) Entry Control, Trunk ReleaseDASH Instrument Panel, Dimming SwitchLIGHTER Cigar LighterPARK Headlamp SwitchCLUSTER Instrument Panel ClusterPWRWINDOWS Power Window Switches

376

Fuses UsageSTOP Stoplamp (Brake) SwitchHVAC Climate Control

CRUISE Cruise Control Module, ClutchStart Switch

AIR BAG Airbags, Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM)

WIPER SW Windshield Wipers and Washers,Transaxle Shift Lock Control Switch

RADIO(BATT1)

Radio Receiver, EntertainmentMemory

ONSTAR Entertainment, MobileCommunications, OnStar®

RADIO (ACC) Radio Receiver, EntertainmentIGN SW Ignition SwitchEPS Cruise Control Switches, EPS UnitPWR OUTLET Auxiliary Power OutletSUN ROOF Power Sunroof, OnStar Mirror

Relay Usage

ALC/PARKRELAY

OnStar®, Radio, Instrument PanelCluster, Body Control Module(Entry Control), Cigar Lighter,Headlamp Switch, License Lamp

FUEL PUMPRELAY Fuel Pump

ACC RELAYPower Windows, Sunroof, Radio,Wiper/Washer Switch, AccessoryPower Outlet

RUN RELAY Climate Control (HVAC Blower,Control Heads)

377

Engine Compartment Fuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse block is located inthe engine compartment on the driver’s sideof the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 280 for more information on location.

2.2L L4 Engine

Fuses Usage

1 Engine Control Module, TransaxleControl Module

2 Not Used

Fuses Usage3 Not Used4 Passenger’s Side Headlamp5 Air Conditioning6 Not Used7 Not Used

8 Anti-lock Brake System, TractionControl Module

9 Engine Control Module, ElectronicThrottle Control

10

Canister Purge Solenoid, MassAirflow Sensor, Low CoolantSwitch, Oxygen Sensors, Air PumpRelay Coil

11Electric Ignition Control Module,Charging System, Neutral StopBack-Up Switch

12 Not Used

13 Transaxle, Engine ControlModule (ECM)

14 Transaxle Control Module, NeutralStop Back-Up

15 PRNDL, Back-up Switch16 Fuel Injectors (Cylinder 1, 2, 3, 4)17 Fog Lamps18 Driver’s Side Headlamp19 Windshield Wiper

378

Fuses Usage20 Horn

21 Entertainment, Premium RadioAmplifier


23 Rear Defogger38 Starter/Ignition39 Body Control Module 1


41 Body Control Module 242 Not Used43 Electric Power Steering44 Air Pump Relay Fuse45 Cooling Fan46 Crank47 Body Control Module 1A48 Body Control Module (IGN 3)

Relays Usage24 Air Conditioning Clutch25 Horn26 Fog Lamps27 Air Solenoid28 Run, Crank (IGN1)29 Powertrain30 Engine Cooling Fan31 Engine Control Module32 Wiper System 133 Wiper System 234 Rear Window Defogger

Diodes Usage

35 § Air Conditioning Diode

36 § Not Used

37 § Wiper Diode

Miscellaneous Usage49 Fuse Puller

379


Fuses Usage1 Engine Control Module2 Not Used3 Not Used4 Passenger’s Side Headlamp

Fuses Usage5 Air Conditioning6 Not Used7 Not Used8 Anti-lock Brake System


10Canister Purge Solenoid, MassAirflow Sensor, Low Coolant Switch,Oxygen Sensors

11Electric Ignition Control Module,Charging System, Neutral SafetyStop Back-Up Switch

12 Not Used13 Engine Control Module14 Boost15 Back-up Switch16 Fuel Injectors17 Fog Lamps18 Driver’s Side Headlamp

380

Fuses Usage19 Windshield Wiper20 Horn

21 Entertainment, Premium RadioAmplifier

22 Anti-lock Brake System23 Rear Defogger38 Starter/Ignition39 Body Control Module 140 Anti-lock Brake System41 Body Control Module 242 Not Used43 Electric Power Steering44 Cooling Fan 245 Cooling Fan 146 Crank47 Body Control Module 1A48 Body Control Module (IGN 3)

Relays Usage24 Air Conditioning Clutch25 Horn26 Fog Lamps27 Intercooler Pump28 Run, Crank (IGN1)29 Powertrain30 Engine Cooling Fan 131 Engine Control Module32 Wiper System 133 Wiper System 234 Rear Window Defogger

Diodes Usage


36 § Not Used

37 § Wiper Diode


381

2.4L LE5 Engine

Fuses Usage

1 Engine Control Module, TransaxleControl Module

2 Not Used3 Not Used4 Passenger’s Side Headlamp5 Air Conditioning

Fuses Usage6 Not Used7 Not Used



10Canister Purge Solenoid, MassAirflow Sensor, Low Coolant Switch,Oxygen Sensors

11Electric Ignition Control Module,Charging System, Neutral StopBack-Up Switch

12 Not Used

13 Transaxle 2, Engine ControlModule (ECM)

14 Transaxle Control Module, NeutralStop Back-Up

15 PRNDL, Back-up Switch16 Fuel Injectors (Cylinder 1, 2, 3, 4)17 Fog Lamps18 Driver’s Side Headlamp19 Windshield Wiper

382

Fuses Usage20 Horn

21 Entertainment, PremiumRadio Amplifier


23 Rear Defogger38 Starter/Ignition39 Body Control Module 1


41 Body Control Module 242 Not Used43 Electric Power Steering44 Cooling Fan 245 Cooling Fan46 Crank47 Body Control Module 1A48 Body Control Module (IGN 3)

Relays Usage24 Air Conditioning Clutch25 Horn26 Fog Lamps27 Not Used28 Run, Crank (IGN 1)29 Powertrain30 Engine Cooling Fan31 Engine Control Module32 Wiper System 133 Wiper System 234 Rear Window Defogger

Diodes Usage


36 § Not Used

37 § Wiper Diode


383

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 402 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Cooling System

2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine 7.4 qt 7.0 L

2.2L L4 Engine 6.8 qt 6.5 L

2.4L L4 Engine 7.2 qt 6.8 L

Intercooler System (2.0L L4 Supercharged) 2.0 qt 1.9 L

Engine Oil with Filter

2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine 6.0 qt 5.7 L

2.2L L4 Engine and 2.4L L4 Engine 5.0 qt 4.7 L

384

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Fuel Tank

2.2L L4 Engine (with NU6 emissions) sold new in CA, ME,VT, NY, NH, MA (see your dealer for bordering states 13.5 gal 51.1 L

2.2L L4 Engine (without NU6 emissions) sold new in allother states (see your dealer for more information) 13.0 gal 49.2 L

2.4L and 2.0L Supercharged L4 Engine sold new inall states 13.0 gal 49.2 L

Transaxle, Automatic 7.0 qt 6.6 L

Transaxle, Manual (Complete Drain and Refill)

2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engines 1.7 qt 1.6 L

2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged 1.6 qt 1.5 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

385

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

2.0L L4 Supercharged P Manual 0.039 inches (1.00 mm)

2.2L L4 (L61) F AutomaticManual 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

2.4L B AutomaticManual 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

386

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 388Introduction ............................................... 388Maintenance Requirements ........................ 388Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 388Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 389Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 391Additional Required Services ..................... 394Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 395

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 397At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 398At Least Once a Month ............................. 398At Least Once a Year ............................... 399Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 402Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 404Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 405Maintenance Record .................................. 406

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

387

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance might not be coveredby warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

388

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at Saturn want to help you keep your vehiclein good working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drivevery short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the timein very hot, dusty weather. You may use yourvehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have any questions on how tokeep your vehicle in good condition, see yourSaturn retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 250.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 272.

389

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 391 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 394 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 395 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, see your retailer tohave a qualified technician do the work.See Doing Your Own Service Work onpage 271.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should have yourSaturn retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your Saturn retailer for yourservice needs, you will know that Saturn-trainedand supported service technicians will perform thework using genuine Saturn parts.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 425.

Owner Checks and Services on page 397 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 402 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 404.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine Saturn parts.

390

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHG OIL message in the messagecenter comes on, it means that service is requiredfor your vehicle. See Change Engine OilMessage on page 183. Have your vehicle servicedas soon as possible within the next 600 miles(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are drivingunder the best conditions, the engine oil lifesystem may not indicate that vehicle service isnecessary for over a year. However, your engineoil and filter must be changed at least once ayear and at this time the system must be reset.Your Saturn retailer has Saturn-trained servicetechnicians who will perform this work usinggenuine Saturn parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 288 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the CHG OIL message appears, certainservices, checks, and inspections are required.Required services are described in the followingfor “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your first servicebe Maintenance I, your second service beMaintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II may berequired more often.

391

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHGOIL message comes on within 10 months sincethe vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II wasperformed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 283. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 288. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 290. See footnote (l). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 339 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 398.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •

392

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels. If you have the2.0L L4 supercharged engine, check intercooler fluid level. Add fluid asneeded.

• •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (k). •

Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g). •

393

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damageor leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 290. • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid(severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid(normal service). •

Replace spark plugs. An EmissionControl Service. •

Replace engine fuel filter. An EmissionControl Service. See footnote †. •

Engine cooling system service (orevery five years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

394

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

2.0L Supercharged Engine: Intercoolersystem service (or every five years,whichever occurs first). See footnote (n).

•

Except 2.0L L4 Supercharged engine:Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (m).

•

2.0L L4 Supercharged engine only:Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (m).

• • •

Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency orthe California Air Resources Board has determinedthat the failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emission warranty or limitrecall liability prior to the completion of thevehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that allrecommended maintenance services be performedat the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe recorded.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect drum brakelinings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect otherbrake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders,calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

395

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace withgenuine Saturn parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hingesand latches, hood hinges and latches, glove boxhinges, sunroof (if the vehicle has one), andany folding seat hardware. More frequentlubrication may be required when exposed to acorrosive environment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) Check system for interference or bindingand for damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace any components thathave high effort or excessive wear. Do notlubricate accelerator or cruise control cables.

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter ifthe vehicle is mainly driven under one or more ofthese conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

396

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour retailer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 293 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected andrepaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(k) Or every 12 months, whichever occurs first.If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

(n) Drain, flush, and refill intercooler system. Thisservice can be complex; you should have yourretailer perform this service. See Engine Coolanton page 293 for what to use. Inspect hoses.Clean pressure cap and filler neck. Pressure testthe system and pressure cap.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your Saturn retailercan assist you with these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 402.

397

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 283 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check the engine oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.Failure to keep the engine oil at the properlevel can cause damage to the engine notcovered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 293 for further details.

Intercooler Coolant Level Check(2.0L Supercharged Engine)Check the coolant level and add DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolanton page 293 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make surethey are inflated to the correct pressures. Do notforget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 337. Check to make sure thespare tire is stored securely. See Changing a FlatTire on page 350.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 339.

398

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake onpage 115.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be readyto turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to startthe engine in each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If thevehicle starts in any other position, contactyour Saturn retailer for service.On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shiftlever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to start the engine.The vehicle should start only when the clutchpedal is pushed down all the way to thefloor. If the vehicle starts when the clutchpedal is not pushed all the way down, contactyour Saturn retailer for service.

399

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 115.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour Saturn retailer for service.

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• With an automatic transaxle, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK only when the shift leveris in PARK (P). The ignition key shouldcome out only in LOCK.

• With a manual transaxle, the ignition keyshould come out only in LOCK.

Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.

400

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

401

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil(2.2L and

2.4L L4 engines)

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum Institute(API) Certified for GasolineEngines starburst symbol.GM Goodwrench® oil meets allthe requirements for your vehicle.To determine the proper viscosityfor your vehicle’s engine, seeEngine Oil on page 283.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil(2.0L L4

Superchargedengine)

The engine requires a specialengine oil meeting GM StandardGM4718M. Oils meeting thisstandard can be identified with theAmerican Petroleum Institute (API)Certified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. However, not allsynthetic API oils with the starburstsymbol will meet this GM standard.You should look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM StandardGM4718M. GM Goodwrench® oilmeets all the requirements for yourvehicle. For the proper viscosity,see Engine Oil on page 283.

Engine CoolingSystem

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 293.

IntercoolerSystem (2.0L L4Supercharged

engine)

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant.

402

Usage Fluid/LubricantHydraulic Brake

SystemDelco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hydraulic ClutchSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

ManualTransaxle(2.2L and

2.4L L4 engines)

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,in Canada 88861801).

ManualTransaxle(2.0L L4

Superchargedengine)

Manual Transmission Fluid(Part No. 21018899).

AutomaticTransaxle

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Usage Fluid/LubricantHood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring Anchor,and Release

Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(Saturn Part No. 21038869 orGM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood, Trunk,and Door Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Sunroof Track

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(Saturn Part No. 21038869 orGM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

403

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour retailer.

Part Saturn Part Number ACDelco® Part NumberEngine Air Cleaner/Filter

2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engines 15893542 —2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine 15036141 A2014C

Engine Oil Filter 12605566 PF457G1

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 52493319 CF1251

Spark Plugs2.2L L4 Engine and 2.4L L4 Engine 12598004 41-1031

2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine 12787099 PFR6T-10G2

Windshield Wiper BladeDriver’s Side — 21.5 inches (54.6 cm) 15245110 —Passenger’s Side — 19.0 inches (47.5 cm) 15245109 —

1AC Delco® Part Number2NGK Part Number

404

Engine Drive Belt Routing

Belt routing for air conditioning option shown.Dotted line shows routing for vehicles without airconditioning option.

2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engines


405

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed theservice, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements onpage 388. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 397 can be added on thefollowing record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

406

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



407

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



408

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 410Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 410Online Owner Center ................................. 413Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 414Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 414GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 415Roadside Assistance Program ................... 415Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 418Collision Damage Repair ........................... 420

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 424Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 424Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 424Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ............ 425Service Publications Ordering Information .... 425

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

409

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer/retailer and to Saturn. Together weare committed to providing our customers withunparalleled service, before, during, and after thepurchase of a Saturn vehicle, for total customersatisfaction. We call this the Saturn Difference.Normally, any concerns with the sales transactionor the operation of your vehicle are resolved byyour dealer’s/retailer’s sales or servicedepartments. If, for any reason, your ownershipexperience falls below your expectations, wesuggest you take the following action:

STEP ONE: Contact the Retail CustomerAssistance Liaison. Any member of the retailmanagement team has the authority and the desireto resolve your concerns. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at this level.

STEP TWO: Should you need additionalassistance, in the U.S., contact the SaturnCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact the SaturnCustomer Communication Centre at1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter team member will handle your call andassist in providing product and warrantyinformation, the nearest dealer/retailer location,roadside assistance, brochures, literature anddiscuss any concerns you may have.

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This17-digit number can be found on thevehicle registration or title, on the upper driverside corner of the dash, or on your roadsideassistance key card.

• The name of your selling and servicing retailfacility.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.

410

When contacting Saturn, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at adealer’s/retailer’s facility. That is why we suggestyou follow Step One first if you have a concern.

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and itsdealers/retailers are committed to making sureyou are completely satisfied with your Saturnvehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlinedin Steps One and Two, Saturn and itsdealers/retailers offer the additional assistance ofa neutral party through our voluntary participationin a mediation/arbitration program called BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto Line.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This programis available at no cost to you, our customer.

Although you may be required to resort to thisinformal dispute resolution program prior to filing acourt action, use of the program is free of chargeand your case is generally heard within 40 days.If you do not agree with the decision given in yourcase, you can reject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using thetoll-free telephone number or by writing them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and other factors. SaturnCorporation reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

411

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation in theMediation/Arbitration ProgramIn the event that you do not feel your concernshave been addressed after following the procedureoutlined in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors ofCanada Limited has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. Theprogram provides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearing before the arbiter.The program is designed so that the entiredispute settlement process, from the time you fileyour complaint to the final decision, should becompleted in approximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offers advantages overcourts in most jurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the Saturn CustomerCommunication Centre, 1-800-263-1999, oryou may write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

412

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturnownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members.

Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updatedinformation and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

413

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist owners who have hearing difficulties,Saturn has installed special TDD(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)equipment in its Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter.

Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer whohas access to a TDD or to a conventionalText Telephone (TTY) can communicate withSaturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users inCanada may dial 1-800-263-3830.

Customer Assistance OfficesSaturn encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a customer wishes to writeto Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:

Saturn Customer Assistance Center100 Saturn ParkwayMail Code 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

1-800-553-60001-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000

In Canada, write to:

Saturn Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada Ltd.CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-19991-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

414

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligibleaftermarket driver or passenger adaptiveequipment you may require for your vehicle suchas hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.The offer is available for a limited period of timefrom the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call theSaturn Customer Assistance Center at1-800-553-6000. Text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-6000.In Canada, customers may call the SaturnCustomer Communication Centre at1-800-263-1999. TTY users in Canada may call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance ProgramFor vehicles purchased in the U.S., call1-800-553-6000 (TTY: 1-800-833-6000).

For vehicles purchased in Canada, call1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 daysa year.

As the owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Saturn RoadsideAssistance Program.

415

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,a person driving this vehicle without the consent ofthe owner is not eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period andin Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 Canada). Service to providediesel may be restricted. For safety reasons,propane and other alternative fuels arenot provided through this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present personal identificationbefore lock-out service is provided. In Canada,the vehicle registration is also required.Lock-out service is covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.A remote unlock may be available if youhave an active OnStar® subscription.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest Saturn retailerfor warranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance provided when the vehicle is miredin sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tirein good condition, when equipped andproperly inflated is covered at no charge.The customer is responsible for the repair orreplacement of the tire if not covered by awarrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start are covered at nocharge.

• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Uponrequest, Roadside Assistance will send youdetailed, computer personalized maps,highlighting your choice of either the mostdirect route or the most scenic route to yourdestination, anywhere in North America, alongwith helpful travel information pertaining toyour trip.

416

We make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestsare limited to six per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance(Canada only): In the event of a warrantyrelated vehicle disablement, while en route andover 250 kilometres from the original point ofdeparture, you might qualify for trip interruptionexpense assistance. This assistance coversreasonable reimbursement of up to a maximumof $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night),and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,and a copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service (Canada only): Therecould be times when Roadside Assistancecannot provide timely assistance. Your advisormay authorize you to secure local emergencyroad service, and you will be reimbursed up to$100 upon submission of the original receipt toRoadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures are coveredunder Saturn’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty forU.S. customers, and the duration of the BaseWarranty Coverage for Canadian customers of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty. However, any costfor parts and labor for non-warranty repairs are theresponsibility of the driver.For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representatives:• Your name, home address, and home

telephone number• Telephone number of your location• Location of the vehicle• Model, year, color, and license plate number• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle• Description of the problem

417

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember we are onlya phone call away. Saturn Roadside Assistance:1-800-553-6000 ; text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-6000. Canadian customerscall 1-800-268-6800.Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Saturn and General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changesor discontinue the Roadside Assistance programat any time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains or other traction devices.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computersystems that monitor and control severalaspects of the vehicle’s performance. Yourvehicle uses on-board vehicle computersto monitor emission control components tooptimize fuel economy, to monitor conditionsfor airbag deployment and, if the vehiclehas the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), toprovide anti-lock braking and to help the drivercontrol the vehicle in difficult drivingsituations. Some information may be storedduring regular operations to facilitate repair ofdetected malfunctions; other information isstored only in a crash event by computersystems, such as those commonly called EventData Recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such asthe airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module(SDM) in your vehicle may record informationabout the condition of the vehicle and howit was operated, such as data related to enginespeed, brake application, throttle position,

418

vehicle speed, safety belt usage, airbagreadiness, airbag performance, and theseverity of a collision. This information hasbeen used to improve vehicle crashperformance and may be used to improvecrash performance of future vehicles anddriving safety. Unlike the data recorders onmany airplanes, these on-board systems do notrecord sounds, such as conversation ofvehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or thedevice that stores the data is required. GM willnot access information about a crash eventor share it with others other than:• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if

the vehicle is leased, with the consent ofthe lessee,

• in response to an official request of policeor similar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigationthrough the discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to bemaintained and need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can readthe information if they have access to thevehicle or the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement orowner manual for information on its operationsand data collection.

419

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GM part, may

be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your Saturn retailermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

420

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This helps guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GMRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 415 for moreinformation.

421

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service is taking it. Get a cardfrom the tow truck operator or write down thedriver’s name, the service’s name, and thephone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go tothe police department headquarters the nextday and you can get a copy of the report for anominal fee. In some states/provinces with“no fault” insurance laws, a report may not benecessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facilityfor your vehicle. Whether you select aSaturn retailer or a private collision repairfacility to fix the damage, make sure you arecomfortable with them. Remember, youwill have to feel comfortable with their work fora long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what workwill be performed on your vehicle. If you havea question, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

422

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts are not covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially value

the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle isleased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even ifyour insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is payingfor the repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

423

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it couldopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it couldorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your retailer or SaturnCorporation.

To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

424

Reporting Safety Defects to SaturnIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou will notify us.

U.S. customers can call the Saturn CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-553-6000, or write:

Saturn Corporation100 Saturn ParkwayMail Drop 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-1999.Or, write to:

Saturn Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsA variety of publications are available to you.Saturn service manuals are written for trainedtechnicians, and in some cases, specialized toolsand equipment are necessary to completecertain repairs. However, the manuals areavailable to owners who either have the training,or wish to gain a greater understanding of thetechnical aspect of their Saturn.

For additional publications information or to orderpublications in the United States, call toll free1-800-2-SATURN or visitwww.saturn-publications.com to order on-line.

In Canada, Saturn service manuals are availableby calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.

425

Owner PublicationsInformation on how to obtain product bulletins andas described below is applicable only in the fiftyU.S. states and the District of Columbia, and onlyfor cars and light trucks with a Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) less than 10,000 pounds(4 536 kg). Copies of individual bulletins arealso at your participating Saturn retailer. You canask to see them.

In Canada, information relating to product servicebulletins can be obtained by contacting yourSaturn retailer.

Service BulletinsSaturn regularly sends its retailers useful servicebulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitorsproduct performance in the field. We then preparebulletins for servicing our products better.You can get these bulletins, too.

Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain tothe proper use and care of your vehicle. Somedescribe costly repairs. Others describeinexpensive repairs which, if done on time with thelatest parts, may avoid future costly repairs.

Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair anew or unexpected condition. Others describe aquicker way to fix your vehicle. They can helpa technician service your vehicle better.

Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting asmall number of vehicles. Your Saturn retaileror a qualified technician may have to determineif a specific bulletin applies to your vehicle.To order Saturn bulletins, call SaturnPublications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visitwww.saturn-publications.com to order online.

426

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 270Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 83Additives, Fuel ............................................ 273Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 375Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 290Air Conditioning .................................. 155, 157Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 168Readiness Light ....................................... 167

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 418

Airbag System ............................................... 68What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 76When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 73Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 71

Airbag SystemsAdding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 83How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 75Passenger Sensing System ....................... 77Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 82What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 75

Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 215

Antenna, XM™ Satellite RadioAntenna System ....................................... 215

Anti-Lock Brake System .............................. 223Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 172Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 371Care of Safety Belts ................................ 369Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 373Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 370Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 366Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 367Finish Care .............................................. 370Finish Damage ......................................... 372Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 368Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 372Tires ........................................................ 372Underbody Maintenance ........................... 372Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 373Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 369Weatherstrips ........................................... 369Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 370

Ashtray ....................................................... 154Audio System .............................................. 186

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 215Care of Your CDs .................................... 215Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 215

427

Audio System (cont.)Radio with CD ................................ 190, 195Setting the Time .............................. 187, 188Understanding Radio Reception ............... 214XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 215

Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 151Automatic Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 292Operation ................................................. 110

BBattery ........................................................ 311

Run-Down Protection ............................... 153Battery Warning Light .................................. 170Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 241Boost Gage ................................................. 180Brake

Emergencies ............................................ 225Parking .................................................... 115

Brakes ........................................................ 308System Warning Light .............................. 170

Braking ....................................................... 222Braking in Emergencies ............................... 225Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 104

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 318Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) ............................... 324Front Turn Signal, Parking and

Daytime Running Lamps .............. 322, 323Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 318Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 318Headlamps ...................................... 319, 320License Plate Lamps ................................ 326Replacement Bulbs .................................. 326Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ..................................... 324Buying New Tires ........................................ 341

CCalibration .......................................... 122, 125California Fuel ............................................. 273California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 271Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 384Carbon Monoxide ............... 98, 120, 244, 259Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 369Your CD Player ........................................ 215Your CDs ................................................. 215

428

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 205Center Console Storage Area ...................... 133Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ..... 324Chains, Tire ................................................. 348Change Engine Oil Message ....................... 183Check

Engine Light ............................................ 174Check Gage Message ................................. 184Check Gas Cap Message ........................... 185Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 278Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 373Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 47Infants and Young Children ........................ 44Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ....... 53Older Children ........................................... 41Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 61Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 64Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 52

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 154Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 371Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 370Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 367Finish Care .............................................. 370

Cleaning (cont.)Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 366Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 368Tires ........................................................ 372Underbody Maintenance ........................... 372Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 369Weatherstrips ........................................... 369Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 370

Climate Control System ...................... 155, 157Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 161Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 160

Clock .................................................. 187, 188Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 293Collision Damage Repair ............................. 420Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 36Compact Spare Tire .................................... 365Compass ............................................ 122, 125Competitive Driving, Racing or Other ........... 234Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 103Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 222Convenience Net ......................................... 134Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 173Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 297

Cooling System ........................................... 300Cruise Control ............................................. 147

429

Cruise Control Message .............................. 183Cupholder(s) ................................................ 133Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users ......................... 414

Customer Assistance Offices .................... 414Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 410GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 415Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn .......... 425Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 424Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 424Roadside Assistance Program .................. 415Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 425

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 151Defensive Driving ........................................ 218Delayed Locking ............................................ 95Differential, Limited-Slip ............................... 227Disc, MP3 ................................................... 205Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 271Dome Lamp ................................................ 153

DoorDelayed Locking ........................................ 95Locks ......................................................... 94Power Door Locks ..................................... 95Programmable Automatic Door Locks ......... 96Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 96Rear Doors ................................................ 97

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 24Seat Height Adjuster .................................... 9

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 234City .......................................................... 239Defensive ................................................. 218Drunken ................................................... 219Freeway ................................................... 240Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 242In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 236Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 250Winter ...................................................... 244

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 375Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 378Floor Console Fuse Block ........................ 376

430

Electrical System (cont.)Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 375Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 375Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 375

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 290Change Oil Message ............................... 183Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 174Coolant .................................................... 293Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 173Drive Belt Routing .................................... 405Engine Compartment Overview ................ 280Exhaust ................................................... 120Oil ........................................................... 283Oil Life System ........................................ 288Overheating ............................................. 297Reduced Power Light ............................... 178Starting .................................................... 108

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ................ 226Entry Lighting .............................................. 153Error Message ............................................ 185Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 418Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 40

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 290Finish Damage ............................................ 372Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 215Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 142Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 145Flat Tire ...................................................... 349Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 350Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 362Fluid

Manual Transaxle ..................................... 293Windshield Washer .................................. 307

Fog LampFog .......................................................... 152

Folding Rear Seat ......................................... 16Folding Seatback, Passenger ........................ 14Front Turn Signal, Parking and

Daytime Running Lamps ................. 322, 323Fuel ............................................................ 272

Additives .................................................. 273California Fuel .......................................... 273Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 277Filling Your Tank ...................................... 275

431

Fuel (cont.)Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 274Gage ....................................................... 179Gasoline Octane ...................................... 272Gasoline Specifications ............................ 273Low Warning Message ............................. 185

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 378Floor Console Fuse Block ........................ 376Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 375Windshield Wiper ..................................... 375

GGage

Boost ....................................................... 180Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 173Fuel ......................................................... 179Speedometer ........................................... 165Tachometer .............................................. 165

Gas, Check Cap Message ........................... 185Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 272Specifications ........................................... 273

Glove Box ................................................... 133GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 415

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 142Head Restraints ............................................ 13Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 318Headlamps ................................ 150, 319, 320

Bulb Replacement .................................... 318Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 151Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 145Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 318High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 145

Heater ................................................ 155, 157Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................ 9Highbeam On Light ..................................... 179High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 338Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 242Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 242Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 278Release ................................................... 279

Horn ............................................................ 142How to Use This Manual ................................ 3How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 24Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 293

432

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 105Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 44Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 337Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 140Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 152Cluster ..................................................... 164

JJump Starting .............................................. 312

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 90Keys ............................................................. 89

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 330Lamps

Dome ....................................................... 153Map ......................................................... 153

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 53

License Plate Lamps ................................... 326Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 167Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 172Battery Warning ....................................... 170Brake System Warning ............................. 170Highbeam On .......................................... 179Malfunction Indicator ................................ 174Oil Pressure ............................................. 177Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 168Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 166Passlock® Warning ................................... 178Reduced Engine Power ............................ 178Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 166Up-Shift ................................................... 170

LightingEntry ........................................................ 153

Limited-Slip Differential ................................ 227Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 250Lockout Protection ......................................... 97Locks

Delayed Locking ........................................ 95Door .......................................................... 94Lockout Protection ..................................... 97

433

Locks (cont.)Power Door ............................................... 95Programmable Automatic Door Locks ......... 96Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 96

Loss of Control ........................................... 233Low Fuel Warning Message ........................ 185Lumbar

Manual Controls .......................................... 9

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 394At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 398At Least Once a Month ............................ 398At Least Once a Year .............................. 399Introduction .............................................. 388Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 395Maintenance Record ................................ 406Maintenance Requirements ...................... 388Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ............................... 404Owner Checks and Services .................... 397Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 402Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 391Using ....................................................... 389Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 388

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 174Manual Lumbar Controls ................................. 9Manual Seats .................................................. 8Manual Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 293Operation ................................................. 112

Manual Windows ......................................... 100Map Lamps ................................................. 153Message

Center ..................................................... 182Change Engine Oil ................................... 183Check Gage ............................................ 184Check Gas Cap ....................................... 185Cruise Control .......................................... 183Error ........................................................ 185Low Fuel Warning .................................... 185Low Traction ............................................ 182Power Steering ........................................ 184Traction Off .............................................. 182Transaxle Fluid Hot .................................. 183Trunk Ajar Warning .................................. 184

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Rearview with

Compass and Temperature Display ....... 125Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®,

Compass and Temperature Display ........ 122Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 129

434

Mirrors (cont.)Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 128Outside Remote Control Mirror ................. 128

MP3 ............................................................ 205MyGMLink.com ............................................ 413

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................. 104Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ....... 404

OOdometer .................................................... 165Odometer, Trip ............................................ 165Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 230Oil

Engine ..................................................... 283Pressure Light .......................................... 177

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 288Older Children, Restraints ............................. 41Online Owner Center ................................... 413OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 129Other Warning Devices ................................ 142Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 160

OutletsAccessory Power ..................................... 153

OutsideConvex Mirror .......................................... 129Power Mirrors .......................................... 128Remote Control Mirror .............................. 128

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 397Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 372Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 116Shifting Out of ......................................... 118

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 115Over Things That Burn ............................ 119

Parking Your Vehicle ................................... 118Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 168Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 161Passenger Sensing System ........................... 77Passing ....................................................... 231Passlock® .................................................... 103

435

PowerDoor Locks ................................................ 95Electrical System ..................................... 375Reduced Engine Light .............................. 178Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 108Steering Message .................................... 184Windows .................................................. 101

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 40Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............ 96

QQuestions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................... 23

RRacing or Other Competitive Driving ............ 234Radios ........................................................ 186

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 215Care of Your CDs .................................... 215Radio with CD ................................ 190, 195Setting the Time .............................. 187, 188Understanding Reception ......................... 214

Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 96Rear Doors ................................................... 97

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 36Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 33Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

Compass and Temperature Display .......... 125Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

OnStar®, Compass and TemperatureDisplay ..................................................... 122

Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 10Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 402Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 256Reduced Engine Power Light ...................... 178Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 90Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 91Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................ 356Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 351Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 326Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 424Saturn ...................................................... 425United States Government ....................... 424

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 84Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 85

436

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 108Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 32Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 415Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 250Roof Rack System ...................................... 134Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 405Running the Engine While Parked ............... 121

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 166Pretensioners ............................................. 40Reminder Light ........................................ 166

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 369Driver Position ........................................... 24How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 24Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 23Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 36Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 33Right Front Passenger Position .................. 32Safety Belt Extender .................................. 40

Safety Belts (cont.)Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 32Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 18Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 31

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 391Seatback, Folding Passenger ........................ 14Seats

Driver Seat Height Adjuster .......................... 9Head Restraints ......................................... 13Manual ........................................................ 8Manual Lumbar ............................................ 9Passenger Folding Seatback ...................... 14Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 10Split Folding Rear Seat .............................. 16

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ..................................... 61Right Front Seat Position ........................... 64

Service ........................................................ 270Accessories and Modifications .................. 270Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 272California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 271Doing Your Own Work ............................. 271Engine Soon Light ................................... 174Publications Ordering Information ............. 425

437

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 82Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 372Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 116Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 118Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 31Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 144Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 365Installing .................................................. 356Removing ................................................ 351Storing ..................................................... 362

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 384Speedometer ............................................... 165Split Folding Rear Seat ................................. 16Starting Your Engine ................................... 108Steering ...................................................... 227Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 142Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 133Convenience Net ..................................... 134Cupholder(s) ............................................ 133Glove Box ................................................ 133Roof Rack System ................................... 134

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 249Sun Visors .................................................. 102Sunroof ....................................................... 135

TTachometer ................................................. 165Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps ..................................... 324

Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 103Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 103Passlock® ................................................ 103

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 142Time, Setting ...................................... 187, 188Tires ........................................................... 328

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 371Buying New Tires ..................................... 341Chains ..................................................... 348Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 350Cleaning .................................................. 372Compact Spare Tire ................................. 365Different Size ........................................... 343High-Speed Operation .............................. 338If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 349Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 337Inspection and Rotation ............................ 339Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 356Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 356Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 351

438

Tires (cont.)Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 362Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 330Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 334Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 344Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 346Wheel Replacement ................................. 346When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 341Winter Tires ............................................. 329

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 256Towing a Trailer ....................................... 259Your Vehicle ............................................. 256

TractionEnhanced Traction System (ETS) ............. 226Limited-Slip Differential ............................. 227Low Message .......................................... 182Off Message ............................................ 182

TransaxleFluid Hot Message ................................... 183Fluid, Manual ........................................... 293

Transaxle Operation, Manual ....................... 112Transmission

Up-Shift Light ........................................... 170Trip Odometer ............................................. 165Trunk ............................................................ 98

Trunk Ajar Warning Message ....................... 184Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 144Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 143

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 214Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 344Up-Shift Light .............................................. 170

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 222Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 250Parking Your ............................................ 118Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and Event DataRecorders ................................................ 418

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 374Service Parts Identification Label .............. 374

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 160Visors .......................................................... 102

439

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 163Warnings

Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 142Other Warning Devices ............................ 142Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 346Different Size ........................................... 343Replacement ............................................ 346

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 52Windows ..................................................... 100

Manual ..................................................... 100Power ...................................................... 101

WindshieldWasher .................................................... 145Washer Fluid ........................................... 307

Windshield (cont.)Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 327Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 370Wiper Fuses ............................................ 375Wiper Lever ............................................. 146

Winter Driving ............................................. 244Winter Tires ................................................. 329

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 212XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 215

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 388

440

2007 Saturn ION Owner Manual M · 2007 Saturn ION Owner Manual M 1. ... 77 Servicing Your...

Documents

Transcript of 2007 Saturn ION Owner Manual M · 2007 Saturn ION Owner Manual M 1. ... 77 Servicing Your...